Home

2011 Dakota Owner`s Guide

1. bw il DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNERS TOR DOWN TOP Uh MANUAL GO ELECTRONIC TERE ae BRA 2 BRAKE WIWOOW LIFT TIRE PHESSURE MALL OESCERT WARMING PARIONG CONTROL T ELECTRONIC ALL WMERL FA URE OF ANTHOCM ORIVE DAANG SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE GRANE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DANE BRAKE TOW HAUL VARN ING TOW WAL Ja A P FOUR WHEEL OMVE LOW AIC PUSH AIR ELECTRONIC CONDITIONEM Si es 010533317 INTRODUCTION 5 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN 010832798 VIN Location NS INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously af
2. Enter Location New Entry Added Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Voice Tree Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement d New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off override phone priorities All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primar e O C G Voice Commands Primar call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergenc English erase all Espanol Francais help home NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Voice Commands Primar language send o 0 list names list phones towing assistance a mute off new entr transfer call n Uconnect Tutorial try again Pr veo indui E other mobile N set up phone settings or phone phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again o redial 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressl
3. EXAMPLE 1 865 Ibs U 70 tse 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Pu ama ee Es Dre Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs mater TE AUS oxi EV 540 ID 325 Ib Bi S 25 Ibs uae ies a c EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 284 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 285 WARNING Continued e Un
4. These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial chains NOTE The use of class S chains is permitted on your vehicle with P245 70R16 tires NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 295 CAUTION e Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with tires other than P245 70R16 There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of your vehicle There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter All season tires can be identified by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that
5. 7 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the nuts in a crisscross pattern The correct nut tightness is 120 to 160 ft lbs 163 to 217 N m If in doubt about the correct WIEN Se tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to your authorized dealer or at a service station help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345 WARNING Continued Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground To Stow The Flat Or Spare Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down Slide the wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and position it properly across the wheel opening For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation stow with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle Rotate the winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into p
6. ACON that meet SAE Type S specifications Replacing original tires with tires of a different size Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires may result in false speedometer and odometer read Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as ings recommended by the chain manufacturer 294 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION CAUTION Continued To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains e Do not install tire chains on front wheels of observe the following precautions vehicles e Because of limited chain clearance between tires Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave and other suspension components it is important ment that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your Continued vehicle Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer
7. NOTE When driving uphill at elevations above 2 000 ft 610 m or when the vehicle is heavily loaded especially when towing the vehicle may slow below the SET speed If the vehicle speed drops below 25 mph 40 km h the Electronic Speed Control will automatically disengage If this happens you can push down on the accelerator pedal to maintain the desired speed Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to im prove vehicle performance it is advisable to lock out OVERDRIVE by pressing the TOW HAUL button lo cated at the end of the shift lever 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console has the following features Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 033333496 Overhead Console e Courtesy Lights e Garage Door Opener If Equipped NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 e Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer If Equipped Courtesy Reading Lights Near the front of the console are two courtesy reading lights Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when
8. NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 323 Towing Requirements Tires When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for further infor mation Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe GAWR limits and satisfactory operation of your vehicle For proper tire inflation procedures refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for further Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or information vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer For the proper inspection procedure refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for further information 324 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
9. e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses Ta eee OES EET ee KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada STARTING AND OPERATING 301 FUEL REQUIREMENTS These engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excel 87 lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular B00dfab6 gasoline having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle 302 STARTING AND OPERATING M Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mendis the use of gasoline that m
10. 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequenc
11. 246 STARTING AND OPERATING M N imited Slip Rear Axle Differential If aM Brake System qas IRE OE BR BE ER RS R RSS 273 EOU p 2 nie see BOERE KOR AR DRR SE DEE 264 3 Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS 273 W Driving On Slippery Surfaces 20 W Tire Safety Information 05 275 MB Acceleraulon iese ao DERE RES SE MA 264 D Tire Markings sees 275 D Traction 6 EE EE EE eee eee 269 O Tire Identification Number TIN 278 E Driving Through Water 260 D Tire Terminology And Definitions 279 D Flowing Rising Water a0 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 280 D Shallow Standing Water 206 Mi Tires General Information 284 W Off Road Driving Tips sse 208 Bre Pressare soos hae aus Sie Ge ee e ne 284 O After Driving Off Road 208 O Tire Inflation Pressures 285 IM Power Steering 22cm e REED RR Gees 269 5 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 286 O Power Steering Fluid Check 270 O Radial Ply Tires sess 287 W Parking Brake sies open hot 240944 271 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 O Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped uer ree 287 O Compact Spare Tire If Equipped 288 o Pull Size Spare If Equipped ss as 289 O Limited Use Spare If Equipped 289 ELDite Spinnin sssri TREE RED ER REEL S 290 O Tread Wear Indicators so E RR
12. 278 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing zits the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 279 Tire Terminology And Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from th
13. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2010 Chrysler Group LLC N m C z O REEDE INTRODUCTION 44399358 9 659 54 n ER DR E
14. blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 277 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
15. character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Fre ey ling Rate boa 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer
16. ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an
17. post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 349 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the air intake duct If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Acces
18. Cleat Retainer Nut To remove the cleats from the utility rail remove the end cap by pushing up on the locking tab located on the bottom of the end cap Slide the cleat off the end of the rail Utility Rail End Cap UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The rear window defroster button is located on the right side of the Air Conditioning and Heater n Control below the A C snowflake button Press this Use care when washing the inside of the rear button to turn on the rear window defroster and the window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water minutes of operation press the button a second time Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window window defroster only when the engine is operating e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 170
19. FLAKE button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode position on the control Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort High blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates on the inside of windows can increase the rate of window fogging NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration of engine coolant to distilled water is recommended Refer to Cooling System under Main tenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer additional engine cooling may be required If this situa tion is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear and set the air conditioner to recirculation mo
20. Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided i should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehic
21. In e Previous Channel to select the previous channel this mode you may say the following commands e Next Channel to select the next channel e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command vR button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu the following commands e Select Name to say the name of a channel e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Save to save the memo 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Command amp vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete AII to delete all memos Setup To switch to system setup you may say on of the following e Change to setup e Switch to system setup e Change to setup e Main menu setup or e Switch to setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that yo
22. MOTORHOME ETC Two Wheel Drive Models fer case switch Shifts into and out of transfer case Recreational towing of two wheel drive models is not NEUTRAL can take place with the transfer case allowable Towing the vehicle with the transmission in switch in any mode position NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Re Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK moval of the driveshaft for towing is not recommended position for recreational towing since this would allow fluid to drain from the Failure to follow these procedures can cause se transmission vere transmission and or transfer case damage NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 329 Recreational Towing Procedure CAUTION WARNING It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre You or others could be injured if you leave the ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from 2 Shut the engine OFF oe poc ae pa ROM MEC mover 3 Turn the ignition key to the ON position but do not ra even if the transmission is in PARK The parking cibos brake should always be applied when the driver is Bane not in the vehicle 4 Press the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmis
23. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils These special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer re quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 CAUTION NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You ca
24. Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit Entry You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit Entry can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit Entry feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Read
25. and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www Siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Pres
26. avoid tangling the loose cable the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations 4 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission On 4 Wheel Drive vehicles shift the transfer case to the AL position 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid icy or slippery areas 5 Turn the ignition OFF WARNING 6 Block both the front and rear of the Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off position For example if the right front the road to avoid the danger of being hit when E wheel is being changed block the left operating the jack or changing the wheel rear wheel 060505162 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle 3 Set the parking brake when the vehicle is being jacked N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 nee n WARNING Continued WARNING Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack help prevent personal injury or damage to your Only use the jack in the positions indicated and vehicle for lifting this vehicle during a tire change Always park on a firm level surface as far from If working on or near a roadway
27. e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can 304 STARTING AND OPERATING M be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United CAUTION Continued States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California CAUTION Continued reformulated gasoline e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor Materials Added To Fuel mance damage the emission contr
28. equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant MS 8985 Limited slip rear axles require MOPAR Limited Slip Additive MS 10111 or equivalent When ever a fluid change is made 4 oz 118 ml should be added to the gear lubricant Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power a Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans Pecan s Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Maintenance Schedule 406 O Required Maintenance Intervals 408 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance The Change Oil message will flash in the instrument
29. ton to the OFF position or turning off the ignition erases the memory WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control ON when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the Electronic Speed Control to cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an acci dent Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push and release the RESUME button Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control System is ON the speed can be increased by pressing and holding the RESUME ACCEL button When the button is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed decrease of 1 mph 2 km h Each time the button is tapped speed will decrease For example tapping the button three times will decrease the speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed
30. 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the devic
31. CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock If Equipped Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate 1 To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and WARNING pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and e With a child restraint installed in the rear passen insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still ger side locations use care when adjusting the can t make the child restraint secure try a different front seat s rearward to avoid the front seatback seating position coming in co
32. Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oils and Refrigerants NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Prote
33. FEE 290 ALHOL G DD P a 8 29 EL Replacement Tires ausa ero asc 08 md 292 IN Lic Chains os uos y 6d x KOS OT ii 293 W Snow Tires PPP 295 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 295 Mi Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 296 Base oy ste aai 4 6568 Sea EE risana 299 O General Information 44 44 oe PEER EERS 301 Bl Fuel Requirements is Es Se es 301 B Reformulated Gasoline 302 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 302 oO E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 303 o MMT In Gasoline o Materials Added To Fuel O Fuel System Cautions H Carbon Monoxide Warnings 305 ll Flexible Fuel 4 7L Engine Only IC PQUIPDEG sis EER pae proe E Eh ee ees 306 O E 85 General Information 306 O Ethanol Fuel E 85 004 307 248 STARTING AND OPERATING M ET del dlt eens 2255544 PE PE WEE 307 ALOA lise ene trees eee se eae ees 313 O Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel BM Trailer Towing s omaia du RE POP Roe RE di 314 Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 308 4 Common Towing Definitions 315 c QM ave O Trailer Hitch Classification 319 di id ERROR OK 309 a Trailer Towing Weights EL Replacenient Parts sa eoe ret eds 309 Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 320 up E visit iore DP MC OE DE FEE 309 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 320 W Adding Fuel N enu ord PS 310 O Towing Requirements 321
34. Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 4s mms 310 TOWING p3 EP 326 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 311 W Snowplow ui page X9 ded es SR His 4 etme ed 327 W Vehicle Loading issie a et Gees 312 W Recreational Towing O Certification Label 312 PE MOO EE E MET EIC opp Vel olik aa sd gr e e ear cR donde ee dd 313 aa EI ans o Four Wheel Drive Models 328 NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 249 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNINCG Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the shift lever in NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK Tip Start Feature Turn the ignition switch to START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this oc
35. KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized 1 Place the shift lever in PARK dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Automatic Transmission 2 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 3 Remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder 021432799 Ignition Key Ignition Switch Positions 1 ACC 4 ON RUN 2 LOCK 5 START 3 OFF NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become temporarily trapped in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 key to the right slightly then remove the key as de scribed If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave children o
36. Pe 6 oS eae soa DER RR DNE 33 Power Steering Fluid 44424 scvr ex VRA Res 403 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 50 Preparation for Jacking lille 340 Pretensioners Beat Dele MC 48 Quad ED su eg ob ee eho DERS ee oes 132 LLL ULELELIULIUILLLISIUSUG N DE 1413 Radial DD WES oos SRSA ES I ERAS Y ea ey 287 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 371 374 Radio Operation 2442644540886 HIERS anpra 238 Rear Axle Differential sss 381 Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails Lis 167 Rear Convenience Storage Crates 163 Rear WindOW aq dore a EAS 5442246 26405 170 Rear Window Defroster less 169 Rear Window Features llle 169 Rearview Mirrors 0 0 ee eee eee eee 85 Reclinine HOME DOES a wise s 93S es 0E DR DER 128 Recorder Event Data 00000 62 Recreational TOWING sasas resns HR egre eee 328 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 329 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 331 Reformulated Gasoline Lun 302 eis N au unis EE EE EUR GE PIECE S 367 Release Hood 0 00 00 cee eee eee 132 Reminder Seat Belt llle 49 Remote Keyless Entry RKE ss oe etos 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 236 Remote Starling DUBIO cess Be cay dde ee d 25 Replacement Keys e ers eda kc a Ro eie maii nes 17 Replacement Part5 usus oes eds dini eia 359 Replacement TIMES ee acoge doe doa
37. SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Program Type 16 Digit Character Display By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to s
38. The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command amp VR button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command EVR button 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 Say a command e g Help Radio AM 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the AN mE da ed iind uM n volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command 2 yey 5 l system is speaking Please note the volume setting for e Frequency to change the frequency Vol d is diff t than th di tem oice Command is different than the audio
39. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle REVERSE Continued This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK i
40. Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Transfer Case Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is evident the transfer case fluid level may be low Have the transfer case serviced immediately CAUTION Damage may result from operation of the vehicle with low transfer case fluid Drain And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Front Axle Fluid Level Check Front axle fluid level should be 3 4 in 20 mm below the bottom of the fill plug Rear Axle Fluid Level Check R
41. VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the EvR button and say 37 4 6 tt Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the EVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the EVR button and say Pair a Phone
42. Wheel and Wheel Trim sis ig Sek e ns 384 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care iss 384 Wheel Changing 4544 64 95 PRE e555 CEPS RED 335 Wheel Nut TORQUE su os vee BED SERE PRO NSR 344 Wind DEE soos ase 444 ase DES wears A oH 35 Widow TOSSIHE oon PER RE Re kia n roba ea 242 VIBOON OO ch Ge eus sehe d vota dto aca E d Ud 33 VOWEL D 33 Rear IIO wate ware Gos oon eae Ed 169 Windshield Defroster sss 78 240 Windshield Washers 139 140 141 368 gu rm 140 368 Windshield Wiper Blades ea ys dm 9s 367 Windshield Wipers 3 2s 643084 GEREP RR 139 140 Wiper blade Replacement 2 oscar ang em 367 Wipers ntermuttent ss 949 399 ate URP E RUE 140 Wrecker TOWIDD ees doen ng sog RR Rod RED Bea EE 202 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magn
43. a4 Be dosi ipi 401 Fid Leaks ii as brei SEDES HADES LERE 80 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 379 eol sa eee eee eee eee ee eae 376 Eise OU iis eee anne os ee ee ces oo 361 Power SICCIING sis 25426552800 d 9539 63 270 Transfer Case ode eae ames 381 Fluid Brake uuum KRY GS eR REESE nidi 403 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 402 Fog Dis unes Exo SA wae peed RA EER S 135 401 Four Wheel Drive eee 258 OPE exei yi eeu eeu NX p E RC Rad 258 Four Way Hazard Flasher 2 2 5 xs 334 Freeime A Stuck Velli le siene n Cha eee en 349 Front Axle Differential 381 Es METRIESE IE AO TO RE N OE 301 onn sp oe 4 310 PIDAN 2392249999 RE OR LO TURPE EE 302 GAUG 2229 beepers be SOPORE Rees S PR 179 IIGEnAfiOl iss seep AE HIE BREED EE 302 Oe aie Kanne xc eu x eov acd word hc adn c 301 402 Requirements 5353 92 x ed Xx Vor ar x 301 401 Wa CAPACI PPM 401 EMMA FREE EE UP EX E 306 FOCU PC 310 FUSES aeaea eee Ee e ERES 387 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 153 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 310 311 357 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge vacas de ao ne n 179 Gasoline Fuel 21143429 a d a3 444545445445 301 Gasoline Reformulated 302 Gauges Coolant Temperature s uos o oz a RR 179 Enel xxu RS eke tenet DA REG AS PES Odometer eet ee ed DPCCCOMECC ii ERROR sean ER RS 181 TACHOMCIC oie EE EP PR OR EU ae Pei
44. be used when easy access to the phone is needed Also the power outlet inside the console compartment can be used to charge the phone while it is being stored in the bin The power outlet may be used for any portable item with a standard 12 Volt power plug Side Open Armrest Lid Pressing the button on the left side of the console opens the console armrest lid The armrest lid will remain open until the armrest lid is closed manually by pressing the lid back into place Two pen holders are provided on the inside of the armrest lid A tissue holder is also provided on the inside of the armrest lid which holds a pocket size soft pack of tissue CAUTION 320 lbs 145 kg and the angle of the load on each cleat should not exceed 60 degrees above horizontal or damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur There are four adjustable cleats that can be used to assist in securing cargo Each cleat must be located and tight ened down in one of the detent s along either rail in order to keep cargo properly secure The maximum load per cleat should not exceed Fa 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To move the cleat to any position on the rail turn the nut counterclockwise approximately three turns Then pull out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the desired location Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the nut 035433587 1 Utility Rail Detent s 2 Utility Rail Cleat 3
45. belt is pulled fully out allow the belt Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of to fully retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound Then carefully pull out only the amount your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the of webbing necessary to latch the buckle best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could WARNING make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or even slide out of part of the belt Follow these outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to in these areas are more likely to be seriously Fe keep your passengers safe too injured or killed Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat N EI 0226328
46. can operate on E 85 NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 307 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame 81ae46a9 Fuel Requirements Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 fuel or any mixture of E 85 Badge these two For best results a refueling pattern that Ethanol Fuel E 85 alternates between E 85 and unleaded gasoline should be E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and avoided EE When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1 4 full 308 STARTING AND OPERATING M e you do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling e you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for a period of at least 5 minutes Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e When the ambient temperature is above 90 F 32 C you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine
47. care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 269 e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessaty e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power ste
48. compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually set the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will be displayed After completing one 360 degree turn with the vehicle traveling less than 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal or metallic objects the CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the Overhead Console This is where the compass sensor is located Manual Compass Calibration NOTE To ensure proper compass calibration make sure the compass variance is properly set before manu ally calibrating the compass If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does not appear you must manually put the compass into the Calibration mode To Put Into A Calibration Mode Turn the ignition ON and set the display to Compass Temperature Press and hold the RESET button to change the display between VAR compass variance and CAL compass calibration modes When the CAL sym bol is displayed complete one 360 degree turn in an area free from large metal objects or power lines The CAL symbol will turn off and the compass will function normally Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings If this occurs the
49. downward covering both windows on the impact side Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deploy ment The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require side air bag occupant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should re main free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the perfor mance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im proved protection for the driver and front passenger Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this ve
50. ee RS T oes 128 D EEEILESILIIIRIIIUIUIIULILILIIIIULL ILL ULLLQLEL GG GO LidqdHi ho o g od 1HOU L G GCPUeLALLLL LLLEEIL LLULLLLULGCILEIZz20 1B4LiuU gdebeselnOeALhLlI 1 N DE X 141 Maintenance bree Dattery sis ER REDE oe Gs 364 Maintenance Procedures 360 Maintenance Schedule 422a 39 4504 406 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 187 358 Manual Transmission Lubricant Selection 42k RUE 403 Manual Service xus sae ERAS eR EEG S MOER 427 Map Reading Lights iis sees GERS eee HR RR 147 Methanol ies ededeceuou nbewe HO RD Id VEE 302 bie 5 2 quic des Ke OR EE DS Side dede e d 85 Automatic DIMMING siese ve vd gd mE dx s 66 Electric Powered i e SEER EE x s 87 Outside ees 87 JXeatVleV oos ob ER ER RE EE SEL OS 85 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System iuda SEA RED Ee 296 Mopot PariS lt sone wed TE EE Ee oe ees 359 426 MTBE ETBE 3 420344 4645560 4084 resileri 302 Multi Function Control Lever 136 New Vehicle Break In Period 119 Occupant Restraints os 4 24 epson HAAR LE RE 35 55 59 Occupant Restraints Sedan 54 55 58 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 301 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 268 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 268 Oil Change Indicato sas sodes ERROR REDE 184 Oil Change Indicator Reset aveo deut ies rema 184 COLE UNG oie saris eod dera at dco eda 36
51. exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 268 STARTING AND OPERATING M OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope If natural obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and cautiously If you must back down a hill back straight down using REVERSE gear Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago nally across the hill When driving over sand mud and other soft terrain shift to low gear and drive steadily Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the wheels Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken
52. finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 428 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving mainta
53. firm level surface only Avoid icy or slippery areas Removing The Spare Tire Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube Insert 6 the tube through the access hole in the rear bumper and into the winch mechanism tube Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se Steps for Removing the Spare Tire e Remove the jack from the stowage compartment using the supplied finger assist tool e Remove the finger assist tool from jack and set aside until jack is stowed e Assemble the jack tools e Locate the tire carrier access hole on the rear bumper e Place assembled jack tool extension rod into the access hole in the direction of the arrow on the bumper trim Z T e Rotate the tool counterclockwise to release and lower Inserting Lug Wrench and Extension the spare tire to the ground so that it can be pulled from under the vehicle e Rotate clockwise to stow the spare tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 RE IRONS 8148c28b Turning Lug Wrench and Extension Spare Tire Stowage Location It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to NOTE The winch mechanism is designed for use with
54. for unauthorized operation When the Ve hicle Security Alarm is activated it will provide both audible and visible signals The horn will sound repeat edly for the three minutes and the headlights park lamps and or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash for an additional 15 minutes NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 To Arm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming After the Vehicle Security Alarm is set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed NOTE If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu ously during vehicle operation have the Vehicle Security Alarm checked by an authorized dealer To Disarm The System Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if the vehicle Sentry Key in inserted into the ignition and turned to ON RUN To exit alarming mode press the RKE trans mitter UNLOCK button or start the vehicle with a programme
55. in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser and radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser and radiator Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sea
56. in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek ru up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function
57. in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the AVR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been swi
58. lamp by raising the ee EDE LES OE wire harness lock tab and pulling on wire harness connector FLUID CAPACITIES Engine Oil with Filter Cooling System Includes 2 1 Quarts 2 Liters for Coolant Bottle 3 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent di sisi ers 4 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent pean nee 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Spark Plugs 4 7L Engine Upper Bank FR8TE2 Gap 0 039 in 0 99 mm Lower Bank FR8T1332 Gap 0 051 in 1 30 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Front Axle SAE 75W 90 Multi Purpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant MS 9763 or
59. lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 032207308 The control buttons for the Electronic Speed Control are located on the steering wheel When engaged the Elec tronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation Resume sel at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h 7 e 5 On Off Electronic Speed Control Buttons 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button to the ON position In the instrument cluster the word CRUISE illuminates to indicate that the system is on To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press and release the SET button Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal normal braking or pressing the CANCEL button will deactivate the speed control without erasing the memory Pushing the ON OFF but
60. lower anchorages are to be intro duced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Extended Cab e The Extended Cab right rear if equipped with a rear seat passenger seating position has lower anchorages for LATCH equipped child restraints LATCH Anchors 022607203 Crew Cab e The Crew Cab second row seat has lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments at all three seating positions Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must
61. mes sages e Press the tt button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup SMS Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system Voice Tree Recent Calls Enter Name Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Enalish Last Number on Phone is redialed Main Menu Phonebook See Phonebook Flowchart Ea See Setup Flowchart Francais The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Uconnect Tutorial Messages Messages 030607515 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed Se Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Current Number is played
62. met before the I engine will remote start Shift lever in PARK Doors closed Hood closed Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level RKE PANIC button not pressed 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death To Enter Remote Start Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start
63. new message e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the Sw button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Message e You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the vr button while the 10 system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to 12 List of Preset Messages 13 1 Yes 14 2 No T9 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Where are you I need more direction LOT Why I love you Call me Call me later Thanks See You in 15 minutes I am on my way I ll be late Are you there yet Where are we meeting 111 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie 16 Can this wait 17 Bye for now 18 When can we meet 19 Send number to call 20 Start without me Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming
64. of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns 296 STARTING AND OPERATING These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed EV E CO EIE 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure the placard is lo cated on the driver s side B pillar NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 297 The
65. over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have a collision Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har ness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 9 779 O O QO Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn STARTING AND OPERAT
66. owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 866 726 4636 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 NN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 425 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs re
67. parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the HomeLink display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the indicator s change from a slow to a rapid flash rate Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans mitter buttons It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If the signal is too weak to train replace the battery in the handheld transmitter NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the indicator s blink rapidly for two seconds and then remains constant continue with the next section Pro gramming A Rolling Code System NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code System 5 Programming A
68. plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap belt tilt the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfortable 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous e A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down and under the belt in a collision e A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash forces to the abdomen not to the stronger hip bones In either case the risk of internal injuries is greater Wear a lap belt low and snug Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional informa
69. player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The controls for the heating ventilation and air condi tioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions Air Conditioning and Heater 045632818 Air Conditioning and Heater Control Air Conditioning and Heater Operation To turn on the air conditioning set the fan control at any speed and press the SNOWFLAKE button located at the NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 right of the control panel Conditioned air will be di rected through the outlets selected by the mode control A light at the top of the SNOWFLAKE button shows that the air conditioning is on Press the button a second time to turn the air conditioning off Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed when the air conditioning compressor is on This is a normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and off
70. the positions shown with the drive tubes extending to the rear Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 8148c293 8148c297 2 Left Rear Jacking Location Right Rear Jacking Location NOTE Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required 5 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or the vehicle unstable and cause a collision It could hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the ways stow the jack tools and the extra tire and wheel vehicle only enough to remove the tire in the places provided 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off Install 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position Stow the the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end replaced tire jack and tools as previously described of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible
71. the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MM A new engine may consume some oil during its first few WARNING Continued thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter It is extremely dangerous to ride in a c
72. the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
73. the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer to Torque Converter Clutch in this section e f the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desir able gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illu minate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cool down the transmission will resume normal operation The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When to Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode top gear is disabled and some shift patterns are modified On vehicles with five speed transmissions shifts into Overdrive fourth gear are allowed during steady cruise for improved fuel economy and automatic closed throttle downshifts to third gear for improved braking will occur during steady braking NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 257 TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instru
74. tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours and in outside ambient temperature Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Lamp to be turned off The system will automatically update and the TPMS Warning Lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 m
75. to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uc
76. to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation I
77. to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three
78. tow must be observed Four Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable tow with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground The speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 25 km or faster than 30 mph 50 km h it must be towed on a flatbed or with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground or with the front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly CAUTION Towing the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground at more than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe transmission damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS H Engine Compartment 3 7L 355 W Maintenance Procedures 360 N Engine Compartment 4 7L 356 BB 91 MC 361 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 357 siese Ii ol esr wis EE eS 363 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 357 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter is ose e a 363 E Emissions Inspection
79. use the vehi cle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Refer to Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System 022632812 LATCH Anchors Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System if equipped We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the vehicle to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces In addition there are tether strap anchorages at each LATCH seating position Refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for
80. 07 Pulling Out Belt and Latch Plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING Continued plate into the buckle until you hear a click e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle your strongest bones will take the force in a collision nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder
81. 1 402 dr AP 401 Chance lev 2e402 ecitaeeeeaseens 361 bra ne oi eats bee ene nena He ee oo 361 roc DP 363 Filtet is oe iaar n READ RE de 363 402 Filter Disposal iek y e cives eves GRAS 363 Identification LOSO iude o9 ER EE EE EE 362 Materials Added to SS ss 363 Recommendation 442 INDEX M AANE x2 554044 26604 6e0 O94 aos 363 Dj m 362 401 Onboard Diagnostic System 2 caedi acsi xs 907 300 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 153 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 2E Outside Rearview Mirrors 4 87 Overdii ye us usus RAD HEERS Nm SS S ME 182 255 Overdrive OFF Switch sasie hae these E 3 s aii 255 Overhead Console 2 244999 EER a 146 147 Overhead Travel Information Center 147 OVeHDeguDe ENE IE So acu ete tien desde DY Hoe 180 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 427 Pamela po tsenetne gies b y ete HEER 23 Eike Bake E 271 Parkim OD Adil sers dome VERDER KEER aa 271 Passio Die ba ea ooie PS SR AA HAARD ES 137 PO eas eer E E EE EE EF 75 Pe Man porn uonisuckeckad ee Bendis E Ses 75 Phone Cellular lt 4 40465 4584 ei RASA dor 88 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 88 Fick DOK ons cet tea Cum Rd d dd ns L2 Placard Tire and Loading Information 280 Power Distribution Center Fuses 387 DOE LOCKS 420 beak be ee heh SE 20 28 Mirrors PT 67 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 160 DIGNE pried ORR RAAR DIS AE sss 269 270
82. 2 STARTING AND OPERATING M VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration Regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door 8120c1d2 s s Certification Label This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and shows the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems Total load must be limited so that GVWR is not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 313 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the component in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wh
83. 232 4 PESE EE AE 142 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 236 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound bystem COHLDOIS see EE BR haha s HORE Ed 236 DIOIAEE REEL RAS pe eee SR RAAP ee ay 391 OWL DIN PE 163 Storage Behind the Seat uus a sorereriarr admi 163 Storage VONCIE ou oor wo eho ari A SCIRE REED o1 DIOE VOUT Vele sis d a ops Boe de a ha 391 BUICK FICC sang Gdn Sg Sob PERS 349 Sy Ute POMOC xcd arse es oa HARE oe eo 363 System Remote Skare saa she ee tanh e d 25 Tachometer marge RR AE mrt v A Shade ee DEE 182 1de EIEEE TEISTE LETTET TETTIE 171 EO PP 394 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 179 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 67 Tut Steers COMMUN PD 142 di OE 4 444 eee enon ee IERE RR eed ORR 249 Tire and Loading Information Placard 280 Tire Identification Number TIN 278 Tire Markings Se SSCSC Cis Dre Safety Information s tou EER RES EE S 275 in 80 284 429 CIN LIE WINGS seers oe es ee Pd meri 29 gc oo cese RR OOR cena eee ae ok 284 erg MT 295 Sura APP 335 COIDPOCE DAG so gore seg PER VREES oes 288 General Information sies s6dek the HA RE 284 Tic Seed os iese Pe ERE ROEI TE 286 Inflation Pressures sa dem AE AR d e pon 285 ito PE eee ese teense nes eas 291 Load Capacity 12461246450 hsv d x yes 280 281 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 296 Pressure Warning Light 189 Ugly Grad Tr 429 Radial 2233943 BREER RR EROR RE EOS 2
84. 6 Glove Compartment 11 Transfer Case Switch 2 Air Outlets 7 Radio 12 Speed Control Switches 3 Demister Outlets 8 Climate Controls 13 Hood Release 4 Instrument Cluster 9 Power Outlet 14 Parking Brake Release 5 Airbags 10 Heated Seat Switches f Equipped 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER o pu e A 2 N LOW CRUISE ANE AH HL Sa ME 2 81c71444 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when ignition switch is in the ON RUN position 2 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en gine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature gauge if the engine overheats UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 3 Turn Signal Indicators Ca When a turn signal is activated a right pointing or left pointing arrow lights up and flashes to indicate the direction of the turn These indicators also indicate proper operatio
85. 87 KeEPlACCHiCNl uox sous aire DOER Ee aoa ees 292 leuc lee AARTO OE RT ORE ET 295 cov 275 284 DIZGS epa uS SB en ote RS TU ES Mad 276 SION DIOS MEE ART os Rees S OP 295 DPabe Vie eepe a ear n 337 OPD egre erei deg eine MR CR I D RR 290 Tread Wear Indicators sies eb 000 fads 290 Wheel Nut IOfQUE 532 2x dice memes hs 344 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 320 Torque Converter Cl tch cu dues irs 257 Tow Hooks EMereency viccaeode as re see 251 TOE DC T 314 24 Hour Towing Assistance duced ee 9 102 Disabled VOI cle scu 3 9 3 9 ME SEE HR PARE 332 Cop P PLr 320 Recreallonal ua EER sg vd cq ER d AR SORS 328 Weight EES OE EET RE EE N es 320 TOWING ASSIGIANCe a doe 4s 4a cane HER DA ORR ES 102 Hcr MC TTE 264 Jer TOWING oco dus Rec E SETS IURE PES 314 Cooling System TIPS acu soto KERR S 927 a EEELLLLLIIIIILIGILIGUULIUUIIIIUIIILILLLLLCEoLE L L LI ICSOLLL LEOLLLL AAAHLALUPOUCOL GJAq0U LUUP OEAeALU U LA G CGGD GG UOGOG CAUA AUA LULI LAeLU LLLLLLLLLC N DE 147 nidi PC AS OT ET OR EE 319 Minim m Reguirements s sssr RR roseis 921 Trailer and Tongue Weight e 320 WINS 324 Trader Tow me Guide iss eed RE GR aee ages 320 Tralee Vels HE acoc segetes ROSS ADS ERA sea RD va 320 Hie de isa 24a oe oa AARDSE ones n DE 292 Automatic SS SS e 12 252 ini RE EE E 14 ODIO le i dcs he dk uot 9 ds ard n pides 252 licut d Tp or 381 di EET Seed ET EE SEE ON 403 Transmissio
86. AA NT Pea ees 191 440 INDEX EE Id Daytime KUNS aad MERS RE ELE oe YS 135 EXIGO xu 2523 4 5 4 RA 65 NEER EE RS SURE 80 FOS ee ee RR oe eee ee MN E 135 185 401 Hazard Warning Flasher 4 22408020044 334 Liesdi IS a oes 2 me a oe here ees og es 134 Hist Beam is seer ass ORE p ERLA ER 138 High Beam Low Beam Select 138 Instrument Cluster 004 179 IMtCMSily CONUOl uu dcr Rae tess VER ess wes 136 Interior sow AS ua aod dus dea eR 135 147 ds e ence gea emu ORE P P dE 399 Lights On Reminder x RR Re 195 Low Fuel PC 179 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 187 De SOP PC ae dep Red OAR he 137 Seat Belt Reminder 180 02921 APT 392 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 189 T m Signal oie eee pees Ham den 80 137 392 394 b D PDT 181 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 179 Limited Slip Differential sa 9 gese ERLA 264 Loading Vellidle uud ees Ro RS Scd Ke RR d 312 n D de eho eae EE ATR eee 280 lg ogcD 28 AUO UNOCK sagas s ae v Ec PRSE ES A dE 31 Automatic DOO 64 44 4454 5 4 Rae RR Pe EE d 29 C Dg PEO EON skande ee EA RES 92 poo RE EE ER EO P 28 MEE ORE PR EER EE EDS ouer DOOF meeer srity Einna BAR RN rR 28 leonine Wiel uacua atout Fs boos Me VOS I5 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH ook skokke doe dede des 67 Libeiedeioi DOU sae EES RUGER EE Raw 367 Eus INOS issie Gadd Ra pkc bE ERO Dex 344 Lumbar Su OH sae 65454 ph oe oe
87. AND OPERATING 263 Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 Turn the transfer case switch to the desired position 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped USE EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear Preferred Procedure NOTE 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to e If Steps 1 or 2 of the Preferred or Alternate Procedure 3 mph 3 to 5 km h are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is in process then the indicator light will flash and the 3 While still rolling turn the transfer case switch to the current transfer case position will be maintained To desired position retry the selection turn the transfer case switch back to the current position wait five seconds and retry shift 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear e The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and 1 Bring the vehicle to complete stop no position indicator lights will be on or flashing 2 With the key ON and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Alternate Procedure 264 STARTING AND OPERATING M
88. AR EE 280 DANGI 1443 424 d 9 a sk bbe P Ee EER and dedica 364 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Saving Feature Protection 138 Belts Ed oe oe oe AO ce he fee Ree 39 78 Body Mechanism Lubrication 367 Brake kid PP 403 Die Sle Vua ceu KEER ard RI Se gd 273 376 Anti Lock ABS 0 000 eee 273 Fd Check PTT 376 Master Cylinder 2 223 se des Gee Ed ER X 376 Pa sei 6G pta aes ae ee ae TE 271 Watse LIGNE erresis titrini be boos 181 186 Brake Transmission Interlock 259 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 79 P lb Replacemient uigu poese ia e Wi beg dex 392 BUDS EIE E E ON s hota ea 80 392 Calibration Compass xa vau SKOEN qot eot 152 Son ELE pete EO EF eee ee oe 170 Capacities Fltiid usus uid 446404 HARE ES 401 Caps Filler Od EP Ne spa ose Ears ebd de 362 Power leeus fied ota p Pan oe Ies 270 Radiator Coolant Pressure 374 SW goa ei ecco set ape te RE OR 383 Carbon Monoxide Warning 77 171 305 Cargo Vehicle Loading 5465464 RE ed dones 912 Geo LIBE sa waa beeen FP PRA HA eee REIS 139 Cellular Phone iss cx roe doa REED S 88 238 Center High Mounted Stop Light 397 Certification Label Se Id Changing A Flat Te 2236209 esau 4 ea ES tets 335 Chart Tue NE erer earna d RI Eo d bed 276 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 358 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 76 CHECKS ale
89. Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE e Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Air Bag System Components e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag and Seat Track Position Sensors system components Advanced Front Air Bag Features e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as e Steering Wheel and Column determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors e Air Bag Warning Light e Instrument Panel EES pec nei The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an e Driver Advanced Front Air Bag impact that requires air bag deployment This low output Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SA
90. And Maintenance E Maintenance Free Battery issues Ee see LIOBPOUS si wag usa uas y e ee Ede ad 358 SERES Maintenance B Replacement Parts 2004 359 de AE EE 367 W Dealer Service us va aerae EE EO EE 360 4 Windshield Wiper Blades rerent 367 o Adding Washer Fluid 368 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M EE ate ele wakes ERROR Pea 368 W Bulb Replacement 2 299994 BAKR RSS 292 AL ONE SIE dre duke cogadh ee pee oe 24 371 o Headlamp Halogen Front Park And Turn sie Rr PP ARE DER RAS 376 ae E a O Automatic Transmission 378 ae zide a i amps 394 a EE en E R 381 4 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp And Cargo O Front Rear Axle Fluid 381 EE N PES OSS POR EG 397 H Appearance Care And Protection From H3cense DampS spestria kadie kenia 399 ecol PP scan Chee ee P 382 de AE N cereus 401 EE durius 98 WEFluid Capacities 0 00 cece cece eee 401 ee ee Ee ow DE Puan B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 402 One woes eeaeae ee een Boe e D eee N 387 N Vehicle Storage 05 391 EG iis s MEESTE RS RO EE EI 403 W Replacement Bulbs 392 EE NENNEN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L 1 Or 6 0710107298 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Engine Oil Fill 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 4 Brake Fluid Reservoi
91. BIC e Front and Side Impact Sensors 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag Do not have any ac items installed which on the instrument panel because any such objects will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protec tive covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy
92. Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The J ack Location vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You In this vehicle the scissor jack and tire changing tools for could be crushed Never put any part of your body Extended Cab models are stowed in a compartment under a vehicle that is on a jack under the rear passenger seat Crew Cab model scissor Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is jack and tire changing tools are accessed by lifting up the on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle rear passenger seat take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas The jack is secured in place by turning the jack screw until the jack is secured into place Continued 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M A finger operated helper tool is provided to assist re moval and stowage of the jack This tool must be removed to operate the jack for changing the spare tire tete ee arae rans Ee 8148c27e Re ee 8148c27 ees GEDOOD EA Jack Stowage Location Extended Cab N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 337 WARNING The jack is designed as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes unless suitable supports are placed under the vehicle as a safety measure The vehicle should be jacked on a
93. CROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Mu
94. Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can resume cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily SNOWPLOW Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect edly or could fail to deploy during a collision 328 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Four Wheel Drive Models CAUTION e Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational Do not add a snow plow winches or any other aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system in a collision and you could be injured towing The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL for recreational towing The NEUTRAL button is located on the lower left hand corner of the trans RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND
95. E STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR to secure a Child Restraint System CRS For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section The following chart defines the seating positions with this feature ee pe GR First Row Row EE EN CRS Lock Second Row CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock If Equipped If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR the proper fastening procedure is as follows 1 For Child Restraint System CRS Pull the seat belt all the way out then latch the buckle and allow the excess webbing to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode This will secure the child restraint tightly and properly 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 For regular occupants Only pull the belt webbing out WARNING Continued far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section If the
96. G Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK For four wheel drive ve hicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEU TRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer so that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight
97. I eae DR EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 2 2200 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION CONTENTS W introduction EA AR N AE HD 4 W Vehicle Identification Number 6 B How To Use This Manual 4 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Mi Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Ed INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR p
98. ING 325 057003766 6 Right Stop Turn 326 STARTING AND OPERATING d jo 9 O O Mo O N o OT O Seven Pin Connector 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps o 057003765 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL feature should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL feature while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will im prove performance and extend transmission life by re ducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 327 NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Tow Haul If Eguipped To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Electronic Speed Control If Eguipped
99. ING AND OPERATING 317 WARNINCG e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch may reduce handling stability and braking per formance and could result in a collision e Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information 057003770 EXAMPLE Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 318 STARTING AND OPERATING M 057003769 057003768 EXAMPLE With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct EXAMPLE Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 319 Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2 000 Ibs 907 kg without added equipment or altera tions to the standard equipment Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Def
100. LIMITED SLIP REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL IF EQUIPPED The limited slip differential provides additional traction on snow ice mud sand and gravel It improves traction when there is a difference between the characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels During normal driving and cornering the limited slip unit is similar to a conventional differential But on a slippery surface the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the wheel having the better traction WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of the vehicle Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface This could cause both rear wheels to spin and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels You could lose control of the v
101. M D 76 Child Restraint 422 4223 EL ASE 63 64 65 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 67 72 Cid Seal PC IIT 69 Cleaning 1o os oa ee fe ed OE te HII 384 Climate OnBPOL ipu sex 3413 244 4 Soe Sos 238 CIOGK ei ae Gea Hehe lees ESSEN EY 194 212 221 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 237 Compact opare TUE uu oos dir aik RD de es 288 Sun A 151 152 Compass CalibraHon ivi a02heu E nes oes 152 Compass VAMANCe ai te4 ta e663 IURE dE P Y 152 Computer dip Travel o sun ird tedotct pissis 147 Console Floor 242 kk REPRE EDE ie RS 165 Console Overhead EE RE ER RR s 146 Contract Service wise he RO au use FR ES DAE 425 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 374 Eoolins stel xod atus tae URE DR dst A anita 371 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 373 CODIAJHP PAC os aces xn d Sape meg Seas 401 Coolant Level len 371 375 Disposal of Used Coolant a4 VERE ya 374 Drain Flush and Refill 372 Ie seio rm 375 Points to Remember sv vise cx REIS 3 3 Pressure Cdp E 374 Radiator Cap a3 v RS RUE RO OP Ed 9 d ER 374 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 372 401 402 Temperature Cage 4 s sposa bees RE PER Rn 179 Crates Rear Convenience Storage sages es ES Rs 163 Cruise Control Speed Control saanaaan 143 D EEEELLLLIISIIIIRIIIIULIIULIULLILILLLLISLI GUIILGUIIAL IGULE SP GAULULLLILULLLULEeLUI L LLLUL AUL NLLL uLL LEUGPI ro X iAjL
102. NDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE iS Windshield Wipers The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever Turn the end of the multifunction lever to select the desired wiper speed 031533033 Wiper Washer Operation Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the LO continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every two seconds The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 km or less NOTE If the front wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wipers will resume operation NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Windshield Washers To use the washer push in on the washer knob on the end of the multifunction lever and hold while spray is desired If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed fo
103. O ke HE 221 Overhead Console Lamps Reading Lamp LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Lie il ar e dede OPRAH RE oe d H13 Front Park Turn Side Marker 3157NA Back Da gas Sh AE RE he dI ee AUR IR HA 9157 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 921 lO Tail pas vesc sr ed STE OR ETE 9145 License Plate Lamp gt 65 005 704 Gore aeg be oes 168 Rear Tail Stop Tumi Signal sss 4 0 a dc et e 3057 BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp Halogen Front Park and Turn Signal Lamps 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the three bolts from the front of the headlamp housing NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 3 Grasp the headlamp and pull firmly to disengage the headlamp housing from the fender panel 4 While firmly holding the headlamp housing in your hands unlock and disconnect headlamp bulb connector 5 Twist 1 4 turn and remove headlamp bulb from hous ing and replace 81489137 NOTE The headlamp bulb is a halogen bulb Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To remove the park turn signal bulb rotate bulb socket Rear Side Marker Taillamps Stop Lamps And 1 4 turn and remove socket from housing Pull bulb Turn Signal Bulbs ight f stralg rom socket 1 Remove the two screws that pass through the bed sheet metal 91489f4 NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 2 P
104. OTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Tire Markings e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure T hich 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and e lemporary spare tires are high pressure compact Temperature Grades spares designed for temporary emergency use only 276 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tires designed to this standard have the letter T e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards
105. OTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the transfer case switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD and 4LOW are located on the instrument cluster If there is no indicator light on or flashing the transfer case is in two wheel drive WD If the indicator light is on the desired position AWD LOCK and 4WD LOW has been obtained If one or more shift requirements are not met 1 An indicator light will flash 2 The transfer case will not shift NOTE Before retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the transfer case switch back to the current position wait 260 STARTING AND OPERATING NN five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure for further information The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking bra
106. Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel
107. RATING 273 CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort reguired to brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that reguired with the power system operating If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal capability the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake use Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Four Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con ditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light When the light is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system reverts to standard n
108. RERO eod 60 ANDA ide vi iese RARR EP ESE BEA DERE HE 55 58 Airbag Window Side Curtain 54 55 58 Alarm Security Alarm 24 os see s 18 181 Alarm Systemi Security Alarm qase ke diaceE RE 18 Alarmi PARE see oko amp T TT T TT TTE TT TT eS 29 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio 208 232 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 2 9 Anti Lock Warning Light se aao 181 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Zt ett OyStGM cents e de bs xU E Fen DE AE 18 181 Antifreeze Engine Coolant a dodo egre 372 401 Disposal TET 374 Vee Ie Cabe as e AE AE s Eu de e E E 382 AASSISIance TOWING sae ea Rina ee oie Skee nes 102 Auto Unlock Doors ius gue ee DEER RS 91 Automatic Dimming Mirror less 86 Automatic Door Locks less 29 Automatic Transaxle lees 12 252 Interlock ler iscriere Regulo ba god grees d 15 Automatic Transmission 249 253 378 Adding PI 4643 4 4454545 PURE RE HOE 379 Fluid Level Check 142599 Rs 379 Ed IYO 222469 30 ELE EREEREER 403 a EEEELLLIIIIGGGIIIGUUIUUUIIIUIU LIS IILLLLAALTILLLULLUNLULLL C I SLLILLLOIEGLUGOqiTGd N DE 133 Sear Rapes iek RAS HAD tenn eee os 299 Special AddIIVEs aac nene 9 8 Bo HA EE N 378 VOGUE sensns qe p EM 257 Ale PMG ss aces oe 54 hee eee eRe Reda eee 403 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 381 B Pillar Location us eas EER ES DR
109. RS 182 peat Kanees soas dera Faq d wr dd NUS ee ee 253 General Information 000 118 301 BES ni EE OE EE ee 386 Grocery Bag Retaitief uiua se Ee R RS KA OER RR ds 165 Gross Axle Weight Rating 313 915 Gross Cargo Weight isi hee ARK shan ede sas 312 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating sees eer RE e 315 ei 26ca4an EE HOS FEE EET OR 812 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 88 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Sanding Waler 0 scs wo n bod RD RD ROS 265 Hazard Warning Flasher uva edd o ESE DER 334 Imiz ielirir Cm 092 Hich Bedi sua oek pur SUPER TUR PRESS 138 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 138 Lents On TSSquhndeP exe a is VEREER RR 135 POO mae Sch Chie eae r aE 137 DWH P 134 Heated Seats PPP 129 Heater Pagine Block uus i3 Sore eria get ai 251 High Beam Indicator 2oee5 aca acse REEDS RE 180 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 138 Hitches Ter HOND super me dv RENE eS ER RS 919 Liolder X UD cs scans s anion bee Roe eder dd MEE 162 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 153 Hood Relese a 20a 5p es vores PRE Rees 132 Ignition X ART TP 12 Nate POG a ara aded es HAAR RYE i 20 Immobilizer Sentry Key 245 os AR he ER ER RR es 15 Infant Restraint 2 2 049 259 299 EES ES SES 63 64 Inside Rearview Mirror 85 D EEEELLLSSILIRIIIIIIUIIUILULLILIIUILLLILL ILLLLUOLALILELOLLAULLELe LILLULALLL AIGGo tq1 1i LENICILLOO EHIaeddldcedOC INDEX 439 in
110. Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you are have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian la
111. SLULL INDEX 135 Gis Gel 22299 eee EK 162 Customer Assistance saaa eee 423 Data Recorder Event llle 62 Daytime Running Lights 2 3 weds ide RR es 135 Dealer Service 22s de ROMA ERU S d RE 360 Defroster Rear Window 169 Defroster Windshield 78 240 Delay Intermittent Wipers Diagnostic System Onboard Differential Limited Slip Dimmer switch Headlight a een RR 180 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 379 OUERS IE sree ange ph n BEER nee oe a4 361 Poner OOED tsetse 9 d ERA SUR EUR ore es 270 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 374 Door loeks M 28 Door Locks Automatic eren 29 Door Opener Garage usu spacer pide SOR IU EORR 159 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow DIGNIS Water ots eds aas DS EE eee es 265 He Lied TT 306 Electric Remote Mirrors 24442644656 48e boek 87 Electrical Power OBEHOBS ove seued tae dee e Er 160 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 143 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 349 JUMP Orne uu cena eet eee es Rd 345 TOW EIoOKS see Sh sorde pe NEE ES 951 MOWING ii AR PS MEERDER US HAD AR EDE 392 Emission Control System Maintenance 358 Engine Air Cleaner Block Heater Se Id Break In Recommendations 7 Coolant Antifreeze ss 402 Exhaust Gas Caution 77 305 Flooded Startin
112. The cinching has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you WARNINCG When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren If Equipped Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now available However because the
113. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Sliding Rear Window If Equipped A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Squeeze the lock to release the window Sliding Rear Window Latch SLIDE IN CAMPERS Camper Applications Certain truck models are not recommended for slide in campers To determine if your vehicle is excluded please refer to the Consumer Information Truck Camper Load ing document located in your Owner s Manual packet or available from your authorized dealer For safety reasons follow all instructions on this important document General Information The Manufacturer s Warranty does not apply to body modifications and special equipment such as a camper unit heaters stoves refrigerators etc supplied by manufacturers other than Chrysler Group LLC For war ranty coverage and service on these items contact the applicable manufacturer NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 To mount a camper unit with an overhang the tailgate can be removed Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables from the retainer pins Raise the right side of the tailgate until the lower right side pivot clears the hanger bracket Then slide the tailgate to the right to remove Carbon Monoxide Warning Vehicles Equipped With A Cap Or Slide In Campers To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide which is deadly the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with Ca
114. Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicators begin to flash Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Theft Alarm is active NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expr
115. a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position fully upward position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter if equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing the recessed area of the corresponding lens NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the vehicle is turned OFF they will extinguish after approximately 10 minutes COMPASS TEMPERATURE MINI TRIP COMPUTER EN This feature allows you to choose between a compass temperature display and one of four trip conditions being monitored 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA US M Button RESET Button Use the US M button to change the display from U S to Use the RESET button to reset the following displays metric measurement units e Average Fuel Economy e Trip Odometer e Elapsed time 033333497 US M Button 033333498 RESET Button STEP Button Use the STEP button to choose or cycle through the four trip conditions 033333499 STEP Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO Displays the average fuel economy since the last reset Average fuel economy is a running average of the amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle
116. ace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing O C O O O O C C O L L L L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center 416 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary DJ Flush and replace the engine coolant at Inspect the front suspension tie rod e
117. after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the sever
118. age your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where u
119. ancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter a second time Panic mode will automatically cancel after three minutes or if the vehicle is started and or exceeds 15 mph 24 km h During the Panic Mode the door locks and RKE systems will function normally Panic mode will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System on vehicles so equipped General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of a battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Battery Replacement The recommended re
120. annel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the rad
121. another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks a
122. arbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on whi
123. argo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people preted as an indication of difficulty riding in these areas are more likely to be seri SAFETY TIPS ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNINCG e Do not leave children or animals inside parked Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against c
124. art the battery park babe LIS the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by WARNINC moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your J ump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK plosion 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive 4 jumper cable to the positive
125. arts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual MATTERY CHARGING CO GLOW PLUG CO MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT STEERING FLUO G FAR URF SWITCH cr WA D vas DOME LIGHT e REEN PARK LIGHTS HEATED WINDSIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL V amp WINIISHIELD WIPER SOE ANBAG AND WAEHER E SRS b AIRBAG bm TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL ou TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAUNT SYSTEM ABC p cD e A dad TURN SIGNALS HEATED 1 DOOR LOCK mag ZO e D B M Mid UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT AIR OUTLET GH MONITOR Z ad Dae 8 PROWT FOG LIGHT MOOD RELEASE cowvesmm 4 WINDOW DOWN ETABILITY CONTROL Go Ka V UFTGATE RELEASE nErR T AMD VENTLATWGFAN WIDOW LOCK rn LOWER AIR OUTLET i G 4 di E AIR CONDITIONING M dece i aum amp LOWER ANCHORS BEAT BELT 0 ry AIRBAG SUDO 0009 EMERGENCY LIGNTES AND TETHER FOR t RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH A Ai
126. as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Continued Continued 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is
127. ase it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset ch
128. attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then attach the tether strap to the anchorage located on the back of the seat being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head re straint and route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the
129. authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 21 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of IC an Onboard Diagnostic system OBD II that monitors the emissions and engine control sys tem If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could RUN and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 5 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condition investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur
130. ay and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mo
131. be extremely the edge of the roadway as possible before raising aredi a materi the vehicle To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued Jack Warning Label 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Lower and remove the spare wheel jack and tools from stowage 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 When changing a front wheel place the jack under the frame rail behind the wheel Locate the jack as far forward as possible on the straight part of the frame prior to inboard transition as shown Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel wrench the tube extension may be used but is not required 8148c28f Positioning of the Jack Front Wheels 4 When changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle in
132. bedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed
133. belt Continued are meant to be used together THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up WARNING on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt internal injury in an accident The belt forces reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as B ES low as possible and keep it snug mt N A twisted belt will not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed W l 022632808 Removing Slack From Belt 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor In the front and second row outboard seats the shoulder will withdraw any slack in the belt belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Press the release button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 6 To release t
134. call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the EVR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are
135. ch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Automatic Door Locks Programming If Equipped The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch 2 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start the engine 3 Within 30 seconds press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE e f you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure e Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 Auto Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle ha
136. child 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Infants And Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren WARNING Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air bag unless the air bag is turned off An air bag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children And Child Restraints e Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible
137. child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching latch plates to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode description under Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions section The chart below defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passenger FirstRow CRS Lock Second Row
138. child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and are older than one year old These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the seat belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they need a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large For Booster Seats e Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm NOTE For additional informat
139. cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicat ing that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop For Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking
140. cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 282 STARTING AND OPERATING M 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure e
141. commended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers IB 022632811 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE These air bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side
142. compass variance must be set according to the Compass Variance Map F 10 BY 9 040506040 Compass Variance Map To set the variance Turn the ignition ON and set the display to Compass Temperature Press and hold the RESET button approximately five seconds The last vari ance zone number will be displayed Press the STEP UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 button to select the new variance zone and press the RESET button to resume normal operation Outside Temperature Because the ambient temperature sensor is located under the hood engine temperature can influence the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are slowly mm updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph 30 km h or during stop and go driving GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off of your vehi cle s battery 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE RRS e The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead WARNING console designating the ditferent HomeLink channels oes F m e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver w
143. ction Agency EPA and is an ozone saving prod uct However the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry gla
144. curs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 250 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Turn the ignition switch to the SIART position and WARNING Continued release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key to the OFF position wait Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get 5 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of the engine has started ignite and damage the an externally powered electric engine block heater avail converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a die able from your dealer is recommended charged battery booster cables may be used to If Engine Fails To Start obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan WARNING gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into information the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
145. d e An energy absorbing steering column and steering I wheel e Knee bolsters for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag An air bag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints sh
146. d Sentry Key The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter the alarm will sound when you pull the door handle to exit NOTE You may accidentally activate the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm horn sounds and lights flash by entering the vehicle without using the RKE transmitter to unlock the door s The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed with the RKE transmitter unlock button or by inserting a programmed Sentry Key into the ignition and turning the key to the ON RUN position 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M ILLUMINATED ENTRY Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks All interior lights will illuminate in the vehicle when the doors are unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The interior lights will remain on for 30 seconds after the last door is closed or until all doors are closed and either the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position or a RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed There is also a battery saver feature that will turn the interior lights off after eight minutes if the ignition is OFF and a door is left open or the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position NOTE None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position un
147. d cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 267 CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not
148. d seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Dial By Saying A Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconn
149. de 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead W
150. de Operating the air conditioner in recirculation mode pro vides the maximum performance from your air condi tioning When stopped in heavy traffic it may be neces sary to shift into NEUTRAL and press the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions This will help prevent snow going into the ducts 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE Operation Tips Chart WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER AND Start the vehicle open the windows and turn the blower control knob to the high position VEHICLE INTERIOR full clockwise Set Mode control knob at or between Jand 2 Set temperature IS VERY HOT control to full cold and press the button on After the hot air has been expelled close NP the windows and turn the mode control knob to the c amp setting counterclockwise at either Edu pilis 2 Jor or press thelc button if so equipped Once comfortable choose a E mode position and adjust temperature control and blower speed as necessary for comfort WARM WEATHER If sunny set the Mode control at or near 2 and press the 4 button on If cloudy or O A dark set the Mode control at or near 75 No cesjis necessary COOL OR COLD HUMID If sunny set the Mode control at or between and 3
151. de upper edges of the instrument panel The demisters also pro vide extra air ducts for circulation They are in operation whenever the Floor Mix Defrost or Bi Level modes are in use NOTE When you turn off the engine you may hear a hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of time This is a normal condition that occurs if the air conditioning system has been on It is not an indication of a problem with the air conditioning system Operating Tips Fast Cooldown For a fast cooldown open the windows and turn the blower fan rotary knob to the extreme right position turn the mode control to the panel fresh position press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn on the air conditioning and 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee drive with the windows open for the first few minutes Once the hot air has been expelled close the windows and turn the mode selector to the Recirculation Panel Mode or Recirculation Mode Bi level position When a comfortable condition has been reached choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control knob and blower speed as necessary to maintain comfort For high humidity conditions it may be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to maintain comfort Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the Air conditioning pressing the SNOW
152. e Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes damage to the sensors may result the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Continued Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 299 The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four tire pressure monitoring sensors e Tire Pressure Monitorin
153. e a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel
154. e adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Outside Mirrors Power Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s The power mirror controls are located on the driver s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight door trim panel overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passe
155. e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be NOTE The Hen also exercise Edit or Delete deleted operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e Note that only the phonebook in the current language The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the is deleted number designation you wish to call e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be The selected number will be dialed deleted or edited 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming
156. e System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the EvR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairi
157. e accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 17 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O The fog light indicator illuminates when the front fog lights are on 18 Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEU TRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 19 Electronic Throttle Control ETC If Equipped The Electronic Throttle Control ETC light r informs you of a problem with the ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee lit with the engine running your
158. e driver s seat can be equipped with The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward six way power The power seat controls are located on Push the four way switch seat switch forward or rear the outboard side of the driver s seat cushion Three ward the seat will move in the direction of the switch switches control the seat movement Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Power Seat Switches MT Four Way Seat Switch NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down d The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the four way seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear seat switches located on either side of the four way switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch 030932997 when you have reached the desired position Tilt Adjustment 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a co
159. e if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio us
160. e ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place EE OE Ve EED ap and for the position indicator lights to be operable If 3 Place the ignition key in the OFF position if it has the key in not ON the shift will not take place and no been moved or the engine has been started RE EE QU 4 Place the ignition key into the ON position engine e Aflashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates off that shift reguirements have not been met 5 Press the brake pedal CAUTION 6 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans niek ed in PARICwi nthe rameter casein e the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object press the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for one second NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 332 STARTING AND OPERATING xe 8 After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off release position indicator lights will flash continuously until the NEUTRAL button all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button 9 After the NEUTRAL button has been released the Be ed transfer case will shift into the position identified by the e The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place transfer case switch and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the key is not ON the shift will not take place and no 10 Start the engine Shift the transmission i
161. e must be the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour e turned on Towing Assistance references e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly e paired to the Uconnect System e If supported this number may be programmable on e and have network coverage some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the
162. e operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 287 WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision AI ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and Wheel If Equipped The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original equipment tire and wheel refer to the recommended tire rotation pattern in Tire Rotation Recommendations in Starting and Operating for further information 288 STARTING AND OPERATING M If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spar
163. e outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position 021832805 NN ou uo T Child Lock Control NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision There is a single opening and closing switch on the passenger doors for passenger window control The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN or ACC position and for ten minutes after the ignition is turned OFF unless the driver s door is opened Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NOTE e After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle WINDOWS Power Windows P The control on the left front door has up down switches Power Window Switch that give you finger tip control of all the power windows 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other con
164. e proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pres sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued WARNING Continued e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your communit
165. e s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is ORE 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042340030 Media Center 130 RES RSC Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equip
166. e sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location Jc 5 LH RICS gages SPS A ROE Tett JTITCHERIWEETEEMVWIEILIISERV ER NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 1 on the driver s side B Pillar 2 T125 70D15 3 420kPa 60PSI 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 281 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4
167. e the cavity num problem in the circuit that must be corrected ber of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart These fuses and relays can be obtained from your authorized dealer 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EF Description Cavity O1 p Spae 5 0 opare Spare NN Power Seat EN EE Spare 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow Instrument Cluster Radio 10 Amp _ Powertrain Control Red Module Fuel RAD AC Coils 10 Amp Instrument Cluster Red Mirror 4x4 Spare Cartridge Fuse Description Run Start Ignition Gra Switch AC Clutch Red Trailer Tow Lt Stop Blue Turn Trailer Tow Rt Stop Blue Turn Ignition Off Draw 2 Yellow Powertrain Control Natural Module Yellow 20 Amp Antilock Brakes Feed Yellow Valves MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 ue o 18 20 Amp Fuel Pump 25 15 Amp _ Instrument Cluster Yellow Blue __ Illumination 19 15 Amp _ Rear Center Brake 26 20 Amp Ignition Run Start Blue Lamp Yellow Feed 20 20 Amp Instrument Cluster 27 10 Amp Power Mirror Yellow Door Locks Brake Red Transmission Shift 28 20 Amp _ Power Outlet Interlock Yellow 25 Amp Audio Amp 29 20 Amp Body Control Module Natural Yellow 4 Wipers EET ap For so ie o Spr Yellow Switchable 31 30 Amp Ignition Run AC Yellow 32 30 Amp Body Control Module 24 20 Amp Powertrain Control Pink 1 Ext Lights 1 Yellow Modu
168. e too low For a bulb check this light will come on momentarily when the ignition is turned to ON RUN If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible Immediate service should be obtained 13 Tachometer The tachometer gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 14 Shift Lever Indicator The electronic shift lever indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the position of the automatic transmission shift lever and the relation of each position to all other positions The display will place a box around the selected transmission range PRND21 If the PRNDL displays only the characters PRND21 no boxes have the system checked by an authorized dealer 15 Trip Odometer The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometer press and release the trip odometer button To reset a trip odometer display the trip odometer then push and hold the button until the display resets ap proximately two seconds NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 16 Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odomet
169. eak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 271 If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the PARK position The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle e eaa aee ESRB RE S Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE The Brake Warning Light only show
170. ear axle limited slip differentials require the use of MOPAR Limited Slip Additive or equivalent Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information This should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made when equipped with limited slip differential Rear 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M axle fluid level should be 1 8 in 3 mm below bottom of filler plug for 8 1 4 in and 9 1 4 in axles Drain And Refill Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Selection Of Lubricant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot o
171. ect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names To Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in
172. ed and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS idle PEE PU 85 oO Uconnect Phone Features see s 101 O Inside Day Night Mirror 85 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 105 o Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 86 O Things You Should Know About Your EOutside Mirrors s ERR 87 Uconnect Phone 2 62 este eee 107 O Outside Mirrors Folding Feature O General Information 118 If Equipped 1 1 eee eee eee eee 87 W Voice Command If Equipped 118 O Power Mirrors uu ue Ge teh eee EG de ws 87 O Voice Command System Operation 118 W Uconnect Phone If Equipped 88 EC OR NES 32522252939 3 975 0 02358055 BEE 54 119 se TE EE ae 20 EINOIGS Trainin seereec scenes RE ae 123 O Phone Call Features 98 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie W Seats O Power Driver Seat 0 00000 0a O Manual Seat Adjustment O Front Seat Manual Recliner BO Manual Lumbar If Equipped o Heated Seats If Equipped O Head Restraints o Extended Cab Crew Cab Rear Seat ll To Open And Close The Hood E Lights o Headlights Parking Lights And Panel Lights o Headlight Delay 123 O bights On Reminder a 24 bre r 195 B Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 135 H Fog Li
173. eee 192 SUBE RE ERG ns Insticions Radio Mode sees 192 ll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES 211 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 211 D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 200 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD O Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 202 And MP3 Audio Play eee odo ETER acd 214 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id H Notes On Playing MP3 Files 216 W Steering Wheel Audio Ai Controls If Equipped a spe si aet mimes 236 O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 219 ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio O Radio Operation aus ace uu vob Shred i ERE d 236 Sales Code RES RSC 00 00005 220 DCD laer sone REDE Spp AAR DADE 297 H Operating Instructions Radio Mode 220 W CD DVD Disc Maintenance 207 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 238 sa AE adedntelansems aoe W Climate Controls raa se ep SE REA ERES 238 Mi M ME di O Air Conditioning And Heater see o ts 238 a a a a ius det di H Operae TIS uso oat ees reci aor Sp od 241 SESE URN Med EE aaa d DOpera on Tips Chart sezezqibs PERSE 244 o Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped 291 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES YOO Do QZ DE n qmum i M r 7 Di DOG 040132817 1 Headlight Switch
174. eee hn 35 H D ttery Replacement 2a ew s 24 HL p bhoulder Bells 2x quce ire ordeo 39 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 44 H How Io Use Remote Start uus us r 25 Ba OE ed m 45 Bes NES IS EE EO EE EE OE 28 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 46 o Manual Door Locks a2 4 8a ER gases aeus 28 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 46 O Power Door LOCKS sdaeezsqyuewesckewdmet s 28 o Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR E Child Protection Door Lock sus are 5 20 4 92 o o o o Ea IG d NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Seat Belt Pretensioners lesus 48 D Event Data Recorder EDR 62 O Energy Management Feature esu wa ed ads 48 ECOL dos aa tet ecuseaetuaceea ORE 63 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 75 2 Bad aa ee aie meee sta id MEE Tips auos BEER GEES Ep RE 76 Bian EE EE ER WOUD are pees om 2d O Iransporting Passengers ux 444425 cerdo Es 76 El Seat belt Eiender 4 44 06 xong RCPERSP ES 51 RT N N N N EP EL BE ENG HE ER oe O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The DOOS peritis RR PEER HR AE ree heads 51 l Y erener Re ew wa DERE a ER 78 H Advanced Front Air Bag Features 99 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls 55 Outside The Vehicle sae RM ED EE RC edad 80 12 THINGS TO
175. eels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Tire Size This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure Cold This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation 314 STARTING AND OPERATING M The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total l
176. eets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gaso line Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 1076 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems and may damage critical fuel system compo nents Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E 85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 303 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance
177. ehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle 260 STARTING AND OPERATING M Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path an
178. el system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed engine running for an extended period If the against you vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBLE FUEL 4 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information diaud The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve E 85 Fuel Cap hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler door label
179. elect between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number w
180. elect the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main t
181. em Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced or immediately if the Brake Warning Light is on If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check the system for leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylin der reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulti
182. em If Equipped For the radio Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to Video Entertainment System VES in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment
183. ent tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity 290 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determini
184. equal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem 286 STARTING AND OPERATING M Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation press
185. er reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the odometer OE 824 348 9545054 ddr Ben ED PR PRE Door Ajar d o TP Fuel Cap Fault LOW GIE ob eed SEER ESE tinas Low Tire Pressure NOPUSE P ER Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required On vehicles equipped with a Overhead Console with Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer some ve hicle messages may display in the Overhead Console with Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer when the appropriate conditions exist Refer to Overhead Con sole with Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
186. er up while lifting the grille with your hand It is located at the bottom center of the grille UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the center front edge of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING 031307494 Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open Secondary Latch Location when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Lift the hood and the gas filled props will hold it open Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA LIGHTS The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel next to the steering wheel Headlight Switch Location Headlights Parking Lights And Panel Lights DO When the headlight switch is rotated to the first position the parking lights taillights side marker lights license plate light and instrument panel lights are all turned on The headlights will turn on when the switch is rotated to the second position Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore diffe
187. ering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering 2 0 STARTING AND OPERATING M system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a l
188. ery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Air
189. ery A two cavity cupholder is available on all Crew Cabs with rear seats mounted on the floor 035133502 EN NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 035133503 Rear Cup Holders Crew Cab Open Crate REAR CRATE N GO STORAGE IF EQUIPPED 1 Crate Handles The rear Crate n Go storage located under the rear seat 2 Crate End Flaps Release Lever lower cushion consists of two removable collapsible storage crates To open the crates lift upward on the crate handles and engage the crate end flaps 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie To remove the crate press on the release lever located on To collapse the crate push the crate end flaps inward to the ends of the base and lift up on the crate disengage Push the sides inward and snap into place To install the crate into the base insert the crate into the WARNING inboard slot and push down on the outboard side of the crate then snap into place Do not sit or stand on this crate It may collapse causing serious injury CAUTION Do not lift up on the End Flaps to open the crate damage to the End Flaps may occur NOTE The maximum loading capacity for the small crate is 30 lbs 13 6 kg and 50 lbs 22 6 kg for the large crate Insert Crate NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers CONSOLE FEATURES IF EQUIPPED Retainer hooks which will hold plastic g
190. es direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected
191. essary irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine 152 000 miles 247 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 420 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer g to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNINCG e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident OO omMCOMITOO mo2zrazmes IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll S
192. essly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS This vehicle has two 12 Volt 13 Amp auxiliary power outlets that can provide power for accessories designed for use with standard power outlet adapters One power outlet is located in the instrument panel below the temperature control setting knob and one is located inside the full size center console When the optional Cigar Lighter heating element is used it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used CAUTION e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Instrument Panel Outlet NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 WARNING To avoid serious i
193. et bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC Lli 11ND33 126 AG Seventh Edition Printed in U S A
194. etup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e fully closed windows e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must a dd h 2 JJ 44 h h id e dry weather condition be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e Even though the system is designed for users speaking e You can say O letter O for 0 zero in North American English French and Spanish ac e Even though international dialing for most number cents the system may not always work for some combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of e In a convertible vehicle system
195. eu PROSES 292 Reporting Safety Defects 3 iss es ARE ARR SEE MI 426 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 184 Restraints Child isse dae ES ROSS EER va 63 69 Restraints Occupat oso usce s podre dert dace eee ma 35 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 5 2 4465 m nes 349 Rotation Tires 2x a oe KEES ER X44 BAR 295 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 78 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 80 Safety Defects Reporting oh vtcbesasvad 55 45 426 Datety Information Dite sis ox o E RR 275 Safety Tips Safety Exhaust Gas 444 INDEX M Satellite Radio Antenna 208 232 Schedule Maintenance leen 406 Seat Belt Maintenance len 386 Seat Belt Reminder 49 Seat Belts Gea um amp Gack Gr Enos Won OOIE d 35 39 78 And Pregnant Women sog sees de KERR Rt s 50 Child Restraint sies cue St DEE se Fas 63 65 Extender 4246 644 Re 255 6R6 Gh S4w ERE SE 51 es AE AO AE vetoes decease N 39 INSPCCHON 4e 474 LR HEHA DRR e HHA RE 78 Pretensioners 2c 44 DEER SR RE E ER Si 48 Reminder 244522 64 24 568 6 RS Ea S 180 Untwisting Procedure sema aee x ah i 46 DCOUS 6 RERTTERTETARTCTSRTCIPTRIRUITEITIUTT 123 FMMSENCIE amp ies ORR RA DRR IP HD oe CR 126 Heated EER BEREG BRA EA RR ED a 129 Lumbar SUPPO x osc hee been Ei REEL 128 GCI 445346455 46562 RENTRER ES T 128 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 181 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 372 402 Select
196. evel setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 min utes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a within two to five minutes seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures es
197. ever toward the steer ing wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie High Low Beam Switch Pull the multifunction lever fully toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low beam High Low Beam Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery Load Shed ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 15 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Cargo Light If Equipped WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on cargo The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the button The cargo lights will also turn on for 30 seconds steering column when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UN LOCK button is pressed as part of the Illuminated Entry feature 031533033 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever 031433492 Cargo Light Switch 140 UNDERSTA
198. f you must leave the vehicle DRIVE This range is for most city and highway driving 2 Second This range is for driving slowly in heavy city traffic or on mountain roads where more precise speed control is desirable use second gear Use it also when climbing long grades and for engine braking when descending moderately steep grades To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h in this range 1 First This range is for driving up very steep hills and for engine braking at low speeds 25 mph 40 km h or less when going down hill use first gear To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h in this range Overdrive Operation The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fourth and fifth if equipped gear Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal temperature operating 256 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE e Ifthe vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for opera tion at this temperature Normal operation will re sume when
199. fect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 12 O Ignition Key Removal 12 B Locking Doors With A Key 15 W Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped 15 H To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel I5 o To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 15 O Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock sy OAR EET EO EE EI 15 ll Sentry Key If Equipped 15 O Replacement Keys s satarra RE RR SUA as 1 O Customer Key Programming 17 ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 18 H To Arm Ihe System ase sche E GE Ek ER 19 O Io Disarm The System is ve 21r RT S 19 I Ilinmated Entry sisie xo eee awn 20 D Vehicles Equipped With Power Door Locks 20 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 W Windows urges we RRLEREOPRIRIS Ia 39291 33 TO Unlock Ihe DOORS is oa RA pe oem Di 21 DOWER VON E uos eq coop em Be dea oe qe v ed 33 A lo Lock Ihe Doors io ss eub x SEES 21 H Auto Down Driver s Side Only 34 Hr Using The Panic Alarm oue 444 oo eee Y EX 29 3 Window Lockout Switch sss 34 O General Information 4244265226 PRSE RE 23 EA add DUENE 269 3 3 998 4 44 prii pii 35 O Programming Additional Transmitters 24 W Occupant Restraints x xs ex
200. ffect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A gASCAP message will be displayed in the odometer Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the prob lem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II sys
201. flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the transfer case switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 2WD to 4WD LOCK or 4WD LOCK to 2WD Turn the transfer case switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the transfer case switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine either running or OFF This shift cannot be completed if the key is in the ACC position NOTE On vehicles equipped with Anti Lock Brake Systems the four wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the original posi tion indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift There may be a delay up to 10 seconds for the shift to complete after the wheels have stopped spinning 4WD LOCK to 4WD LOW or 4WD LOW to 4WD LOCK NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants NNS TA H TING
202. g Telltale Light IX The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information 300 STARTING AND OPERATING M The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave sig nals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 U
203. g a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 10 Vehicle Security Light The vehicle security light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN 11 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System bes ABS The light will illuminate when the igni tion switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 12 Oil Pressure Warning Light qm The Oil Pressure Warning Light illuminates when the engine oil pressure has becom
204. g uu pes bx RR ER 250 Fuel Requirements sis a dex bici en reani 401 Jump DEGREE scusa soe SR Eee Oe eee Ys 345 OU ea eee ee eee Bere ee ee ee 361 401 402 OILEMISECOIB 2444844 ne shun ed ers ae aes 362 Oil Selection mes dees REEDE SP HD as 401 BES ide ve AE tm naan eat eed 363 virgi p poe eae eae ye oe et oe po nas eas 249 Temperature Gauge css cases Ex RA RARE gi 179 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 59 Entry System Illuminated suiers ees ed 20 Ethanol lees 302 Event Data Recorder Ls 62 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 77 305 ExhausE yoM s nocuit LEK oe vb deo ERR 77 368 Extender Seat Belt 2255544486 RR REPRE EE 51 Exterior Lie HUN 4444 554 5455an 5 tappia 134 Penor GODIS gpp reae ibd bad BESWAAR RE oe ae 80 Filters Air Cleaner oi sb EA RAAS dus Eum xb Ee 363 Pone OIL 15 asas EER o seg ptm nea 363 402 Eee Oil Disposal sa 4425 e Pare ER ea es 363 Flashers Pazar Warming ape ary s aoe aw oe eee woe es 334 TU IO Nd pee sade en See e Ba 80 137 179 394 Flat IS DOW ACS oue it eon sone EO OR EES 345 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Crisis Range D 309 Puce Cl 3215 9444 ARE 93 IO PH hae GE 308 Piel Requirements sed sube res 306 307 Maintenance 2 2o 30 Rondo EN EO ERA 309 Replacement Parts 51400545 244249454 4 309 Diane fine so e ok beet RS P RES 308 Flooded Engine Starline 2 22294 v2 29 eee 250 Sn INDEX 437 Floor Console 2 922999 1339 94 fo ES 165 Platt C apaclUBS osse o3 65694 e098
205. ghts If Equipped 135 ai seed di 223 4055 oh eyed RT EE SEE 135 O Multifunction Lever sa 3 vu KS edP 136 E Battery caver 2464455 EED RR p cR ROK RS 138 O Cargo Light If Equipped 139 Mi Windshield Wipers And Washers 139 A Windshield Wipers sisse ose od RR seas 140 BO Windshield Washers 0 141 la Tilt Steering Column 142 ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 143 O To Activate uua b8445485 656846 bbs S633 144 El To Set A Desired Speed iue rite a es 144 El IG Deac HVG x 2099 9 terrre Ei ws oe 9298 RE 144 O To Resume Speed se de 0608444 Pe de 144 o To Vary The Speed Setting 145 o To Accelerate For Passing 145 Mi Overhead Console sels 146 O Courtesy Reading Lights 147 ll Compass Temperature Mini Trip Computer 147 EDS NL BUHO e seie ber m oy ot on 148 Bl Reset DUON s scs acd aee TR 9 ne OR aos was 148 AStep BUON os oo 239 3 374 8559 4398 wee baad 149 O Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO 149 0 Distance To Empty DIE oe ses REG 05 0 149 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Hi Trip Odometer ODO 25 su PER RR ERK 150 Elapsed Pie El 94 eos sone leo ERA 150 EC CT BHLLON AA AA 63 ee EUR Er 150 o Global Reset 2 25222 rs O Compass Temperature Display D Automatic Compass Calibration 152 O Manual Compass Calibration 152 B To Pu
206. grees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in
207. has traveled When the fuel economy is reset the display will momentarily blank the history will be erased and the AVERAGE WILL CONTINUE FROM WHERE IT WAS BEFORE THE RESET The reset value is based on a minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled from the previous drive cycle The display may take several miles kilometers for this value to change de pending upon driving habits Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank The estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE iii NOTE The DTE is not resettable When Distance To Empty LOW FUEL the fuel gauge pointer will initially be on the red E marker At this point fuel gauge pointer on the red E marker there is reserve fuel capacity which corresponds to approxi mately 876 of tank volume This reserve capacity was put in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions in areas where there aren t many gas stations NOTE The Distance To Empty will remain equal to zero until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset NOTE The maximum value is 6000 miles 9656 km approximately Resetting of this scree
208. he belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing 022632810 etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage Extended Cab 022632809 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it down to make sure that it is locked in the desired position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Center Lap Belts The front center seating position has a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch
209. hicle 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear rollover or side collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your pro
210. hicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors If the ignition is OFF when the doors are locked the parking lights will flash on once and the horn will chirp once 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ii Horn Chirp Programming The horn chirp feature is shipped from the assembly plant activated If desired this feature can be disabled by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on the RKE trans mitter 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button for at least 4 sec onds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the PANIC button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 5 Test the horn chirp feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cau
211. iles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NN Id 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before fi
212. ill display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel aw
213. information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Command Syst
214. ining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com NN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 429 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is sh
215. initions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Dut Fifth Wheel Greater than 10 000 Ibs Gooseneck 4540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Dino Trailer Weight Ratings for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drive train 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 320 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings NOTE For additional trailer towing information in cluding maximum trailer and tongue weight rating for your vehicle refer to the following website addresses e http www ramtrucks com e http www dodge ca Canada Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type
216. inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is requ
217. io faceplate SINGLE DISC WPS PUSH AUD Gi TIME 042305232 Media Center 130 RES Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes
218. ion ant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain th
219. ion refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Standards The manufacturer recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will e Improper installation can lead to failure of an use it before you buy it infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be Carefully follow the instructions that come with the used in a rear seat of a vehicle that does not have restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may an air bag off switch A rearward facing infant not work when you need it restraint in the front seat uu d be struck by a The Extended Cab first and Crew Cab second row deploying passenger air bag which may cause outside seating positions have cinching latch plates These are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt
220. ion of Qil 42444408044 EL EER eU SESS 362 Sentry Key Immobilizer 224 2 6 04185 dws Be x 15 Sentry Key Programming 4 405505 94a eee se os 17 Sentry Key Replacement 5 05 2 ics ex ducha 17 Service and Maintenance ls 360 Service Assistance llle 423 Service Contract 00 eee eee es 425 Service Manuals is vee oer ER dees Gee tae 427 Decne the C IDOK gee od AE AR oa He 194 212 221 Shifting Automatic Transmission 253 Transfer Case ee ee 258 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 2 SS SS SS SS se 329 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 2 SS SS SS SS eee 331 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage M Shoulder Belts 225 war SR E er ARSSREUhS RR ES 39 D EEEELLGISILIIIISIIIIIIIILULALIRILL IILILIIEeLLUGUbA ALLILA LAULL G MLA LEeANLIDULUGIOoULXnI DELALIP GGU UG N DEK 145 ional TUN sae hue nets RE RE RD 80 137 179 394 Snow Chains Tire Chains LL 293 SNOW LOW wa ee oS Bao eee ee eee SEE 327 Snow Tires 4 AE coe wee ee hed ena wees 295 pare D sesse EA Pie SA een 288 289 337 Speed Control Cruise Control 143 vere nrc Pr qq 181 Ee PP 249 Engine block Heater uos xax P Uri 251 Engine FaustO stat susse id MAR EER en 250 Remote AR SE 1 sod ew vw PE RS a 29 Steering Column Controls eee 136 Foelie d E vb od eke ew ES 269 270 Wheel Lock 00 00 0000 0 eee 15 Whee DE
221. ion to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a dipstick use the following procedure If your vehicle has a capped dipstick it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 24 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the shift lever in PARK Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required i
222. ired and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult seat belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your
223. is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button numbe
224. ith a garage door opener that has stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor mation or assistance HomeLink Buttons Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Theft gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage Alarm if equipped is active while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Programming HomeLink Before You Begin The Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC illuminates the HomeLink symbol a house with an arrow inside it along with 1 2 or 3 indicators under it when a HomeLink button is pressed Pay attention to the indicator s as they will flash at different rates or remain solid during training If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds Release the buttons when the indicators start to flash It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be
225. ith a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre gen ln P Rote bps 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144
226. itle In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tu
227. ity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the SABIC The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the SABIC inflates This especially applies to children The SABIC is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts front and side impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to certain impact events NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn
228. ivider Slot 2 Wheel Housing Indentions 2 Secure the tailgate in the partially open position 3 Open the tailgate slightly UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 4 Snap the tailgate support cable between the cable 2 Remove both cables from between the cable guides guide and the tailgate bumper Do this on both sides of and the tailgate bumpers and lower the tailgate the tailgate CAUTION e Care should always be exercised when operating a vehicle with cargo Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced Severe turns or rough roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may result in vehicle damage Ensure the load is securely tied down and is properly identified according to local laws if it extends beyond the tail lights Loading should not exceed 400 lbs 181 kg of b d material suspended above the wheelhouse and Tailgate Guide partially open tailgate or vehicle damage may result To return the tailgate to the full open position 1 Lift up on the tailgate UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS W Instrument Panel Features 177 O List Button Mi Instrument Cluster ess 178 ee Mode POT ME NV SED oa ie eae D Info Button W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 179 Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 205 L Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo E Usenet talents ke alee Satellite Radio If Equipped 207 MP3 WMA AUX Jack 0 0 0c eee
229. ke when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit E STARTING AND OPERATING 261 WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission p
230. lace against the underside of the vehicle Continue to rotate until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click three times It cannot be overtightened Push against the tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place NOTE To Stow the Flat or Spare Wheel retainer does not fit through the center of the aluminum wheel The tire must be stored in a safe manner in the bed of the truck J UMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in 346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster Preparations For J ump Start pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the so please follow the procedures in this section carefully engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur 060810381 WARNING Positive Battery Post Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347 WARNING sits 3 If using another vehicle to jump st
231. late accidentally or Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal I may not function properly if modifications are circuits and interconnecting wiring associated made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer with air bag system electrical components While the air for any air bag system service If your seat includ bag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during manufacturer approved seat accessories may be the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system first turned to the ON RUN position for persons with disabilities contact your autho rized dealer The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MM NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the
232. lay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 426 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a maj
233. le 352 O lo Stow The Flat Or Spare iss oa ag ms 345 D Four Wheel Drive Vehicles 352 D Two Wheel Drive Vehicles 352 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the top flasher When the switch is activated all directional of the steering column just behind the steering wheel turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming e P mum uu traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers od This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery Hazard Warning Flasher Switch NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 J ACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Continued e The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel
234. le s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire
235. le B 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Pink M 5 T Case Lx xp 9 urbem Pink LAE Light 2 Red opal gemunt 1 Green tem Blower Motor Red LANE 1 sd F eooo Yellow _ Lamps Blue e pem he Ere KL WEN od Green 30 Amp Trailer Tow B EL OE Pink Green Module Pump EED Green Spare 40 Amp Rear Defogger Green See Spare 10 Amp Heated Seats Red 20 Amp Airbag System 2 Yellow 58 20 Amp Heated Seats Yellow 59 10 Amp Climate Control MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Cartridge Mini Red 2ystem Module gt LA Red Module E I Yellow 3 Reverse Lamps VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove fuse J13 in the Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM labeled Main Ignition Off Draw IOD e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Dome LiP s os epos Ee Geta oe HD Me d WL212 ES ai ao one RR r OR D
236. le driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Always make sure that floor mats are properly e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the attached to the floor mat fasteners Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al wa
237. less the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approxi mately 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 021432799 Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors When the unlock button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first unlock button press by using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button for at least 4 sec onds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Ve
238. ling by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill CAUTION If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush witha e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly result in engine damage and may decrease corro dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the speci fied engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Do not use plain water alone or alcohol based Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further they may not be compatible with the engine cool informat
239. ll be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Continued NS TA H TING AND OPERATING 293 WARNING Continued TIRE CHAINS e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having CAUTION adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control The use of chains is permitted only on vehicles equipped with P245 70R16 tires Use only Class S chains or other traction aids
240. llision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted Manual Seat Adjustment seat belt For models equipped with manual seats the driver and Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the Passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by chest In a collision you could slide under the seat the floor belt which could result in serious injury or death Adjusting Bar 030932992 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Front Seat Manual Recliner To recline the seatback lift the recline lever located
241. lso be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE
242. lter 32 000 miles 52 000 km T Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the engine air cleaner filter irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine 24 000 miles 39 000 km Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the CV joints Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Inspect the front and rear axle fluid damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center a m Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear eve
243. luster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Dry with a soft cloth MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly FUSES Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center Your vehicle is equipped with an electrical power distri bution center located on the left side of the engine compartment CAUTION When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The Power Distribution Center use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a relays A description of each fuse and component may be properly rated fuse continues to blow it suggests a stamped on the inside cover otherwis
244. m eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control up until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are re quired during the day If the dimmer control is not in this position the audio display may be difficult to read if the headlights are on during the daytime 031433491 Dimmer Control NOTE Club Cab Quad Cab models may have an optional switched dome lamp that is operated by press ing the lens Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights Signaling Turns UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e f a turn signal has been left on for a minimum of mile 1 6 km a continuous chime will sound Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction l
245. mbination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positi
246. ment cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy is included in all automatic transmissions A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Overdrive and in Drive NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usu ally after 1 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmis sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL switch when the 258 STARTING AND OPERATING M transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive e If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This i
247. more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your abilit
248. n eee eee 253 378 Automatic 4125 SERE eee de bee 249 253 378 ld n a E 2a 403 bleek ice eR qM 378 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Key less EO ei rex RIPE REEES 24 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink lt ua aer Ee po PE OE ERA E 159 Tread Wear Indicators 0008 290 Inip COMPUT gcc debe hea eos des d Ri pee ERA 147 Air OdOMIeIel ase EE 264 9919 Boars a ex echa 183 Trip Odometer Reset Button 12a eyes 191 Tun IDEE loe eq i es CERE PS RSS 137 179 392 394 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 88 Underhood Fuses 000 eee eee 387 Unitorm Tire Quality Grades say ardt a He esens 429 Universal Transmitter 0004 153 Unlock Auto eene 31 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 46 Utility Rails Rear Cargo Area 167 Variance COM DASS 4404 AA OE eb ie a 152 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 448 INDEX M Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Veludle DIOE mes 9 933 HERE A BAR e Pob ord 291 Voice Recognition System VR sss 118 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 179 Warnings and Cautions sued KERR RR E RE DEK RS 6 Warranty Information 2 2 5 aee ah ok RE de HERE 426 Washers Windshield sss 141 Washing Vehicle sis Sor dece ar tes 383 Water Driving TOU axxo ia ERU EORR new eo 265 Weight Load C an dg as uhr mi xin eee c 312
249. n Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button
250. n expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect driveability 310 STARTING AND OPERATING M ADDING FUEL If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door When CAUTION fueling the cap may be placed on the inside of the filler door e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING e Never allow any lit smoking materials near the vehicle while removing the cap or filling the tank Continued DOOIE STER LE Gas Cap Holder NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING Continued e Never add fuel to the vehicle when
251. n if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 64 000 miles 104 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the engine air cleaner filter irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine 56 000 miles 91 000 km Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Cha
252. n of the front and rear turn signal lights If either indicator flashes at a faster rate than normal check for a defective bulb If either indicator fails to light up when the lever is moved check for a defective fuse or turn signal LED A single chime is activated when the left right turn signal is left on with the vehicle speed greater than 15 mph 24 km h for more than 1 mile 1 6 km 4 Low Fuel Warning Light The low fuel warning light will illuminate when the fuel gauge reads 1 8 of a tank or less There is a pointer on the side of this symbol that indicates the side that your fuel filler door is located 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ieee 5 High Beam Indicator ED The high beam indicator will illuminate if the headlights are on high beam 6 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first tumed to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 7 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi ee tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H Hot this indicator will illuminate and a
253. n will cause the trip odometer to change to zero Then the trip odometer must be reset in order to update the trip odometer miles Elapsed Time ET This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause the display to change to zero C T Button Use the C T Compass Temperature button to select a readout of the outside temperature and one of eight compass headings that indicate the direction in which the vehicle is facing 033333500 C T Button The system will display the last known outside tempera ture when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is dis played Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not up dated when the vehicle is not moving UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Global Reset If the RESET button is pressed twice within two seconds while in any of the three resettable displays AVG ECO ODO ET the GLOBAL RESET will reset all three displays Compass Temperature Display WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Automatic Compass Calibration This
254. nal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors 021807201 Manual Door Lock Knob 021832801 Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from acciden tally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks If Equipped 2 The doors will lock automatically if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock swit
255. nchor strap is pulled tight Tether Strap Routing Loop 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat Crew Cab 1 Route the child restraint tether strap under the head restraint for the outboard seating positions and then si TAR 4 BN through the anchor strap outer loop webbing material NI EN Sa di zi loop located directly behind the child restraint 2 Route the tether strap across to the nearest installed anchor strap and attach the tether strap hook to the anchor strap inner metal ring 3 Remove the slack in the tether strap so that both 4 5 anchor straps are pulled tight i NOTE Two anchors must be used for any of the three Multiple Child Restraints seating positions 1 Inner Anchor Strap Rings 4 Passenger Side Rear Child Seat 2 Snap Hook 5 Center Rear Child Seat 3 Tether Strap 6 Drivers Side Rear Child Seat NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers or even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child restraint to secure a child restraint top tether strap See your authorized dealer for help if necessary Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in
256. nd computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ed MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 um ir d dio 54 2205 16 56 48 Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 48 64 96 128 44 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is n
257. nds and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for 104 000 miles 169 000 km or 60 months damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary whichever comes first M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 417 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 418 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 1 Change the engi
258. ne oil and engine oil 128 000 miles 208 000 km filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine 136 000 miles 221 000 km Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary m a M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 419 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or Schedule 114 Months Maintenance _ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil 144 000 miles 234 000 km filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the 1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of engine air cleaner filter replace if nec
259. ne the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when
260. ng e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the EVR button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VR button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say S
261. ng in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans mission only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only except
262. ng when your tires should be replaced STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to 055007576 1 Worn Tire follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure 2 New tre You could lose control and have a collision resulting These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread in serious injury or death grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline 202 STARTING AND OPERATING M Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification wi
263. nge the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 413 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 72 000 miles 117 000 km Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect the CV joints whichever comes first Inspect exhaus
264. nger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Folding outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage Power Mirror Switch 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move 030407200 Mirror Directions When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s a
265. njury or death e Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Sy Paw yese oos LL TMT TW Den PRN ma 4 VEEREEROEEEEARE ORES y e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 034637507 Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 22 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Front Console 2 1128 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS CAUTION If your vehicle has bucket seats with a center console e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw there are three cupholders located on the console power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Use these only inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be ae driven a sufficient length of time to allow the Front Cup Holders Crew Cab generator to recharge the vehicle s batt
266. nst carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex WARNING Continued haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep over materials that can burn Such materials might into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve cation or oil change Replace as required hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn CAUTION e The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information effectiveness of the catalyst
267. nstructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Butto
268. ntact with the belted child directly behind the seat The child could be injured Child Restraint Tether Anchor i j The Extended Cab model has one routing strap Improper installation can lead to failure of an A i 35354 bine bolonm OF tie rear Guibsard infant or child restraint It could come loose in a seating position The tether anchor itself is collision The child could be seriously injured or located od BA OE IE n between the killed Make sure the child restraint tether strap is two seating positions When there is a rear seat delete always routed through the proper anchor strap option the tether anchorage located on the cab back inner loop panel is designed to be used for the front seat center seating position The Crew Cab model has three anchor ages located behind each of the rear seating positions rear left rear center and rear right THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Tether Straps at the Rear Passenger Seat 2 Route the tether strap across to the center tether Extended Cab anchorage The center tether is located behind the slide door in the center of the vehicle between the two seating 1 Route the child restraint tether strap through the routing loop located directly behind the child restraint The routing loops are located behind the flip down door on the cab back panel padded bolster positions ri 022632815 Tether Strap Routing 3 Remove the slack in the tether strap so that the a
269. nto DRIVE to position indicator lights will be on or flashing verify that the transfer case has engaged e Aflashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates 11 Set th king brake Shift the t ission int SU oa EE uii M AM that shift requirements have not been met PARK NOTE CAUTION e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until one second elapses and the shift has been completed If any of these requirements with the exception of 3 key ON are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the one second time then all of the mode e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged e Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage internal parts WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Mi Hazard Warning Flashers 334 W Jump Starting Procedures 345 W Jacking And Tire Changing 335 O Preparations For Jump Start 346 Hie doe OR score again ead ED ani VAT 335 O J tmpestarung Procedure lt i ms 23 xa eas O Removing The Spare Tire s am Bra sk ien 337 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ss see os RES N BRA O PreparaliOfiS 1 9 3 9 4 AO e Ren d DIR YR dd 340 Mi Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped SIE ONS soe Pbi ris xU RT ERE PEERS 341 W Towing A Disabled Vehic
270. nto the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE Ifit is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room temperature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release the parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube CAUTION e Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
271. o rotating the key to the LOCK position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to any other switch position ACC ON or STARI engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Automatic Transmission The electronic PRNDL on the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear selected The shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the desired drive position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE SECOND FIRST or PARK or when shifting out of PARK Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever into the PARK position 254 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Continued e
272. oad is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate WARNING Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control and result in a collision Also overload ing can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 315 Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weigh
273. octor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning e Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de wiring including adding any kind of badges or ployed If you are involved in another collision the air stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the bags will not be in place to protect you upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im Continued mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING Continued Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to e Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag 9 inflate for your protection in a collision The system The air bag may inf
274. of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 321 CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Load ing Information Placard in Starting and Operating for further information Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do nottow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued 322 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Continued WARNIN
275. off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Igni tion Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 2 Fully depress th
276. ol system All gasolines sold in the United States are required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in unnecessary cost There fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate Fuel System Cautions service Contact your authorized dealer for service CAUTION assistance e When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature is high use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock If spark knock per Continued sists lighten the load or engine piston damage may result Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e The use of fuel additives which are now being WARNING sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Many of these products contain high concentra Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can tions of methanol Fu
277. on the outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever when you reach the desired position 03093299 b m Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Manual Lumbar If Equipped Some vehicle may be equipped with a manual lumbar support The manual lumbar rotary control adjustment is located on the left side of the driver s seat Rotate the knob to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support Lumbar Adjustment Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF When the HIGH l
278. on the vehicle at any given time NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 289 WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipm
279. on anti lock brakes Turning the ignition OFF and ON again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary 274 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Continued Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop e The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others WARNING e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system afforded Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a Continued pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly STARTING AND OPERATING 275 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION N
280. on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the Maintaining Your Air Bag System skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your d
281. one is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may Towing Assistance not be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need towing assistance area e Press the amp button to begin e f supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in gency your mobile phon
282. oned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt This feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver seat belt is fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence la
283. onnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the EVR button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the EvR button and say Transfer Call Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect Phon
284. ons Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one an
285. opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing 3 6 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e f frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled deionized water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning also keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake Syst
286. or all engine applications The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine 252 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater CAUTION Continued e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt into any forward gear when the engine is above electrical cord could cause electrocution idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION is firmly on the brake pedal WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Continued NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 253 Key lgnition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior t
287. or dusty roads or if you drive Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once and to protect your paint finish Take care never to a month scratch the paint P e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels be kept clear and open 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pad
288. or investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer NN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 427 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it
289. osition The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position refer to the following infor mation 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High This range is used for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction for loose or slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low This range provides low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose or slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and is used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information 262 STARTING AND OPERATING M Shifting Procedure NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift the indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indica tor light will continue to
290. ot supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG
291. ould be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat modified to accommodate a disabled person contact as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided Refer to Child Restraints under If You Need Assistance You should read the instructions provided with your WARNING child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more 2 All ts should al their d EE E iL Moa severe injuries in a collision The air bags work shoulder belts properly with your seat belt to restrain you properly In 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Always wear your seat belts even though you have Front Air Bags room to inflate air bags 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your Continued vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags
292. own on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to di
293. p Or Slide In Campers should extend beyond the overhang ing camper compartment and be free of leaks TAILGATE Tailgate Removal To simplify mounting a camper unit with an overhang the tailgate can be removed quickly Follow these steps 1 Open the tailgate to a 45 degree angle 2 Unclip and remove the cables from the box while maintaining a 45 degree angle 3 Lift the tailgate off of the pivot on the passenger side by pulling upward and rearward at the same time 4 Slide the tailgate to the passenger side while making sure clearance from the box and taillight is maintained To reinstall the tailgate do the following 1 Slide the tailgate onto the driver s side pivot 2 Hold the tailgate at a 45 degree angle and insert it into the passenger side pivot 3 Clip the cables to the box 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Two Position Tailgate Upper Load Platform Your tailgate can be opened to the full open or the partial open position The partial open position is for loading objects longer than the length of the bed sheets of plywood etc by creating an upper load platform Installing Lumber 1 Place lumber across the box in the indentations pro vided above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor There are indents in the sheet metal or bed liner if equipped on the inner side of the box in front Club Cab only and behind both wheel housings 1 Bulkhead D
294. pecially if used for long periods of time Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision i c Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjust Adjustment Button ment button located on the base of the head restraint Rear Head Restraints and push downward on the head restraint The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head re straints Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things T o Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on child seat tether routing 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Extended Cab Crew Cab Rear Seat More cargo space is available by lifting up on the rear seat cushion The Crew Cab Rear Seat is a 60 40 split cushion and full back Either cushion can be raised independently TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 First pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 031307193 Hood Release Lever Location 2 Then push the safety latch lev
295. ped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can a
296. performance may be speaking the digit string make sure to say Send compromised with the convertible top down e Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance not in motion is recommended _ e Audio quality is maximized under e It is not recommended to store similar sounding MEER N ET N names in the Uconnect Phonebook 5 low to medi hicl d e Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo did M E OE cal name recognition rate is optimized when the e low road noise entries are not similar e smooth road surface 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the
297. ph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS Lamp Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the TPMS 298 STARTING AND OPE RATING NEE Lamp will still be ON In this situation the TPMS Lamp will turn off only after the tires have been inflated Sonne to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the tire pressure moni toring sensor CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have NOTE been established for the tire size equipped on your e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire damage may result when using replacement failure or condition equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam ag
298. placement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 5 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 021432709 NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 2 Remove and replace the battery When replacing the battery match the sign on battery to the sign on the inside of the battery clip located on the back cover Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves of the case together Make sure there is an even gap between the two halves If equipped install and tighten the screw until snug Test the RKE transmitter operation REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be
299. power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Engine Oil Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Checking Oil Level 00 l time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance To PA pope lubrication of your vehicle s engine the Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The tion best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can dam
300. proportions through the l ef floor and defroster outlets Blower Control The rotary knob on the left of the Defrost control panel is the Blower Control Turn the knob clockwise to one of the four positions to obtain the blower speed you desire To turn the blower 045632820 Off turn the knob to the far left posi tion CH Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield through the defroster outlets located at the base of the windshield and the demister outlets located at the edge of each side of the instrument panel NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control The rotary knob at the center of the control panel controls the temperature of the interior air You can choose your degree of comfort by rotating the knob The coldest temperature setting is to the extreme left blue region and the warmest setting is to the extreme right red region of the rotation 045632821 Circulation The cab is designed with features to promote outside air circulation There are grilles in the cab back panel These are air exhausters that provide the means for regular exchange of cab air UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Side window demisters direct airflow specifically to the window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the glass They are located in the extreme outsi
301. quals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib of Occupant 3 160 Ibs Occupafi amp 100 Ibs
302. r 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Distribution Center Fuses 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Battery 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L 1 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Power Distribution Center Fuses 6 Battery 6 071310717 7 Engine Oil Fill 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also a
303. r a period greater than one second while in the off position the wiper will wipe approxi mately three wipes after the wash knob is released 031533035 Washer Operation To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating infor mation can be found on most washer fluid containers 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ii WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use TILT STEERING COLUMN A This feature allows you to tilt the steering column J 031607339 upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the EE steering column below the turn signal lever Tilt Steering Column Lever Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Push the lever away from the steering wheel to lock the column firmly in place NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to
304. r animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Manual Transmission If Equipped When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position the steering and ignition systems are locked to provide antitheft protection for your vehicle It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your vehicle Move the steering wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns easily To remove the key Ignition Release Button 1 ACC 4 ON RUN 1 Press and hold the release button located between the gt LOCK 5 GT es ignition switch and the instrument panel 3 OFF 2 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 3 Remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key into the door lock cylinder with either side up To lock the driver s door turn the key rearward To unlock the driver s door turn the key forward For external door lock lubrication refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevent
305. r cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse affect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 e Insects tree sap and tar e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing ve h iminish the gl hi h i e Salt in the air near seacoast localities pee diminish the gloss or thin out the paint e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels scratch metal and painted surfaces completely with clear water e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu paint and decals lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove Special Care e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR e If you drive on salted
306. r will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio or CD The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that yo
307. re Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the S button and follow the audible prompts for directi
308. re And Cleaning MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield wiper de icer Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru ments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument C
309. rent lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlight on for 60 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off The headlights will remain on for 60 seconds Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON Lights on Reminder If the headlights parking lights courtesy lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started the transmission is out of the PARK position and the parking brake is released This provides a constant lights on condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than normal intensity If the parking brake is applied or the transmis sion is in the PARK position the Daytime Running Lights DRL
310. rocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab Floor Console Features The Floor Console between the driver s and front pas senger s seat has the following features e Miscellaneous storage compartments 3 Three cupholders two removable e iPod Phone storage bin e 12 Volt power outlet inside storage compartment e Side open armrest lid e Tissue holder and two pen holders Grocery Bag Retainers 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MMM e Coin slots located under the instrument panel center WARNING stack Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Cellular phones music players and other handheld electronic devices should be stowed while driving Use of these devices while driving can cause an accident due to distrac tion resulting in death or injury Storage Compartments Some miscellaneous storage compartments and cuphold ers are both removable and dishwasher safe upper rack of dishwasher only for cleaning purposes Various stor l age compartments provide versatile and useful storage Floor Console A coin holder is also provided inside the driver side storage bin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 CARGO AREA FEATURES Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails If Equipped Power Outlet And Portable Phone Storage The console is equipped with a power outlet and an iPod phone storage bin The phone storage bin can
311. s steel wool a bristle brush or metal pol ishes Only MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recom mended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Use MOPAR Vinyl Cleaner or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery and trim Leather Seat Ca
312. s been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of PARK and the doors closed Auto Unlock Feature Programming The Customer Programming sequence to disable or en able Auto Unlock 1 Enter your vehicle and close all the doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may be confusing during this programming procedure 3 Insert the key into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK position to the ON RUN position and back to LOCK position a minimum of four times ending in the LOCK position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door LOCK switch in the UNLOCK direction 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 To reactivate the feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If necessary repeat the above procedure 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors of your vehicle have the child protection door lock system Child Protection Door Lock Location To use the system open each rear door slide the lever up to engage the locks and down to disengage the child protection locks When the system on a door is engaged that door can only be opened by using th
313. s due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION IF EQUIPPED Transfer Case Operating Information Precautions The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the transfer case switch which is located on the instrument panel 81a4283e Transfer Case Switch The transfer case provides four mode positions Two wheel drive high range WD Four wheel drive lock range AWD LOCK Four wheel drive low range AWD LOW Neutral N NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 259 The transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and high way conditions on dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by turning the transfer case switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure for further information The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose or slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW posi tions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components N
314. s steering the vehicle with out the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved approximately a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel one half revolution turn off the engine and remove the key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock engages To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON RUN position and the brake pedal is pressed SENTRY KEY IF EQUIPPED The Sentry Key prevents unauthorized vehicle opera tion by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM The system uses ignition keys that have an em
315. s that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 272 STARTING AND OPERATING M When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front WARNING Continued wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Apply the parking Never leave children alone ina vehicle Leaving brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a the load on the transmission locking mechanism may number of reasons A child or others could be make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could The parking brake should always be applied whenever operate power windows other controls or move the driver is not in the vehicle iek da WARNING e Never use the PARK position of the transmission as a substitute for the parking brake Always Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible in jury or damage Continued NNS TA H TING AND OPE
316. s the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you rele
317. se the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System 6 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Flash Lamps With Lock Programming 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter 2 Continue to hold the UNLOCK button for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the LOCK button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 4 Test the Flash Lamps With Lock feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the OFF position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps Using The Panic Alarm To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press and release the PANIC button on the RKE trans mitter once When the Panic mode is activated the interior lights will illuminate the headlights and parking lights will flash and the horn will sound To c
318. sed oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free batt
319. sequence for a third cycle Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e The transmission is moved out of PARK e The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks All the doors can be manually locked from the inside by pushing down the door lock knob located on the door trim panel Both front doors may be opened from the inside with the door lock knob in the down or locked position e For perso
320. sic Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Program Type 16 Digit Character Display By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll equipped up and down the menu if equipped NOTE e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between e The available selections for each of the above entries P playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by varies depending upon the disc pU E E E e These selections can only be made
321. sing wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle is equipped with a non matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1 This spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitor ing sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the spare tire 2 If you install the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the full size spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions
322. single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the tempera ture gauge to pass H Hot the indicator will continu ously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature light is on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle in neutral with the air conditioner turned off until the light turns off If the light remains on turn the engine off immediately and call for service NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Fol low the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 8 Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle s speed 9 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencin
323. sion into NEUTRAL Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing 330 STARTING AND OPERATING M 6 Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object press the transfer case NEUTRAL button for four sec onds 81977fda NEUTRAL Button 7 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light comes on release the NEUTRAL button 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 10 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 11 Repeat Steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in DRIVE 12 Shut the engine OFF and place the ignition key into the unlocked OFF position 13 Shift the transmission into PARK 14 Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar 15 Disconnect the negative battery cable NOTE e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until the four seconds elapse and the shift has been completed If any of these require ments with the exception of 3 Key ON are not met NNS TA H TING AND OPERATING 331 prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no Returning to Normal Operation longer met during the four second timer then the Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until normal usage all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button Reenen bes batten ede is released e Th
324. size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 24 4WD Indicator This light indicates the vehicle is in four wheel AWD drive and 4LOCK 4WD allows all four wheels to receive torque from the engine simultane ously NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 25 SVC Service 4WD Indicator The SVC 4WD illuminates when the ignition key is turned to the ON RUN position and will stay on for two seconds If the light stays on or illuminates during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required 26 Cruise Indicator The cruise indicator illuminates when the electronic speed control system is turned on 27 Cargo Lamp The Cargo Lamp indicator will illuminate CARGO when the Cargo Lamp is ac
325. someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck And do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h Do not spin the wheels continuously for more than 30 seconds The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Allow the engine to NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 351 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED WARNING Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck i vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps may become disengaged caus ing serious injury CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle 81c8b51c Tow Hooks 352 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use of safety chains is recom mended Attach towing device to main structural mem bers of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brack ets State and local laws applying to vehicles under
326. sories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever rhythmically between FIRST and REVERSE while apply ing slight pressure to the accelerator CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle 350 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck even failure of the axle and tires A tire could vehicle CAUTION Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It explode and injure
327. ss for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals When freezing weather is anticipated flush out the water in the reservoir by operating the system Fill the reservoir with windshield washer anti freeze not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection agai
328. ssipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 432 p LLILIILILILILIIUILLIIIILILIULLUIIILILULLU UHILILLELIL LOI LALLL LULLLL LL LIULALILUA AA0 lU ed Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 373 e EEE tes 310 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 363 Air Conditioner Maintenance 366 Aur CONCIMOUING uas vos igrani Een de ds 238 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 366 367 Aif Conditioning SYSTEMI ss wat 28 ot oboe a sos 238 366 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 238241 A TUE gece FOR ved bs S uem d mus 363 Air Pressure Tires llle 285 GUIS 1042 3 cee nope oa ete POP B 51 58 190 Aitbasz Deployment raisti rrid r eters RE 59 AND GOD sees cs CR ee ome ee os 57 61 78 Airbag Maintenance acu 9 kiea e ACE
329. strument Cluster 4455644543000 RES ER p 179 Instrument Panel and Controls 177 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 386 Interior Appearance Care ue o on ERK ug do ie 385 Interior CONS x woaecon qoe hose AAR eh ages 135 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 140 IOC HEL ON ESEL DR EA a SA SUME US eta as E Jac amp JI6radliol sw see e verd qe ae P TP TY aces 335 Jacking Instructions icu ues ed ic a mit es 341 Ese de ARE TE N OE oe cone ER ETTE 345 Key Programing 44446 om oy oe BE RENE Hews 17 Key Replacement sis ues 303 03 ER ORE HER RES 17 Key sente d Ium DIZGE is ee ie RR RC es 15 Keyless Entry Systemi vaa ARE RR ER Ree 9 mii 20 EOS Arr 12 Kites Bolster A rr m m 5l Lane Change and Turn Signals 137 179 394 Lane Change ASSIS soeke HEDE hog Ere edes 197 Lap shoulder Dells ase duce prata desde d des 39 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 67 Late Ls see SENE NUS S RON EU ewe OE eee 60 Peaks PIG 3822429920243 oe EES AA 80 Life of Tires ss oase BaG S05 hoe be tone TR TS 291 Light Bulbs AE EE EE ET PEST TS 80 Ieri A CETTE 80 134 ADA A D 57 61 78 190 Anti Lock Warning sissies ged ERA 34s 181 back DOP e dae sees oe ee aon ee oe 394 Brake Warming 94 4 ness des EMS E Roe d iiti 186 bulb Replacement 2s oe deam b RT ache 392 COLO 494 x 44 Ohi een ER RETRO ERA RE S 139 Center Mounted Stop a3 2 5 2 c3 oboe 9e a 397 Courbes Read ie sos oes Ee RE o8 68s 147 quu AA
330. sts for 96 seconds or until the driver seat belt is fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the driver seat belt is fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts If the driver seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illuminate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert Programming Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MA BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON RUN or STARI position 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON RUN or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position engine does not need to be running Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON RUN position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds ending
331. system e Next Station to select the next station Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu menu e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM e Radio to switch to the radio mode To switch to the FM band Say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands In this mode you can say the following commands e Disc to switch to the disc mode F to change the f e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e Frequency to change the frequency ii e Next Station to select the next station e Setup to switch to system setup e Previous Station to select the previous station NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 e Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio y To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite AE Radio In this mode you may say the following com e Next Track to play the next track Fa mands e Previous Track to play the previous track Ch l h he ch l l aa a i RM Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo
332. t The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision 316 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball b
333. t Into A Calibration Mode 152 OOutside Temperature aas eue 2m Re 153 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 153 O Programming HomeLink 155 H Gate Operator Canadian Programming 157 USING Loeb sedute E ie frami 158 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME D Reprogramming A Single ll Rear Window Features 169 HomeLink BOON 522 99 sens eee ees 158 HI Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 169 Hoe 444 aa 923 S os HER oa eae Eb odas 158 7 Sliding Rear Window If Equipped 170 Ee OME a E W Slide In Campers 170 O General Information 159 mier N ER GES oe ee ae ed ARE 170 N Electrical Power Outlets 160 ar M 170 erosie celo aa EE EET 162 TE EE Ee Mi Rear Crate N Go Storage If Equipped 163 Equipped With A Cap Or Slide In Campers 171 O Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers x ee mnn IINE ii T LE W Console Features If Equipped 165 O Tailgate Removal 4 24d ERES ne 83 171 o Floor Console Features a sce sd wes 4 Koo 165 o Two Position Tailgate Upper Mi Cargo Area Features 167 ER yanmar shea IE a H Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails EOD DEd cu acre dove c een foo pU HEUS 167 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should b
334. t problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 424 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or
335. t system Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for change if using your vehicle for police damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center Signature Authorized Service Center 414 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Service Center NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 415 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 4 7L Engine Replace the top row and side row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine Repl
336. tched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile ph
337. tection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the LOCK NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on
338. tem may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing
339. that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from the Uconnect Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used
340. the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE S
341. the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal regulations and may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on a truck bed You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e f fuel is poured from a portable container the con tainer should have a flexible nozzle long enough to extend into the fuel filler tube e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off 31
342. the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once A Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se Required Maintenance Intervals NOTE Vehicles built with the 4 7L engine are equipped with sixteen spark plugs One set is located on the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is located on the side of the engine The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard plug and must be changed every 48 000 miles 78 000 km The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a premium plug and must be changed every 96 000 miles 156 000 km NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 M
343. then press the E button CONDITIONS on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or PEREAT No kes necessary ds 4 HO COLD DRY CONDITIONS In cloudy or dark weather set the Mode control at or near a2 If sunny set the Mode control at or betweenlsd land 2 land for snowy or very cold weather requiring extra heat D to the windshield uself In most cases turning on the Air Conditioning press the button will clear the fog then adjust temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As it gets WINDOW FOGGING colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield If so set the Mode control at 2 lor S Jana adjust temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging 045635554 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS aM Starting Procedures uus emos emer m 249 W Automatic Transmission 252 O Automatic Transmission 249 H Key Ignition Park Interlock Eiers Slatin uoo o duda eye RED eS P rS 249 O Brake Transmission Interlock System O Extreme Cold Weather O Automatic Transmission RE LH Gear Ranges cs s eoe te eue eee thames 253 Olf Engine Fails TO Start ss ues suae Hawes 250 ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped 258 A After OUE oe oe eee eee ods eae es 251 eo Intosmstion Mi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 291 PICCOMMONS C P 258 ISMN Troede 29203 3 919 39 ceeds 262
344. tion refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The following chart defines the type of feature for each seating position ef Center Right First Row Cinch if Cinch equipped Cinch if equipped NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the co
345. tivated by pressing LAMP the CARGO button located on the headlight switch 28 TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear shift lever This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL button has been selected 29 4WD LOW Indicator This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive LOW mode The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels 4 LOW 30 Odometer Trip Odometer Button Press the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button to toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer display Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX J ACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate pene mpm t im mom EI r DISC MP3 WMA 042040029 Media Center 230 REQ Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 de
346. to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy The Mode Control at the right of the control panel can be set in any of the following positions 045632819 Mode Control NOTE To improve your selection choices the system allows you to operate at intermediate positions between the major modes These intermediate positions are iden tified by the small dots Recirculation Modes Panel or Bi Level Select the recirculation modes when the outside air contains dust odors high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired This feature allows for recir culation of interior air only Air flows either through the panel outlets or oth the panel and floor outlets to gether depending on which recirculation mode is selected Panel Fresh Air Modes p Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel J 811b550b 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Bi Level NOTE ugh Outside air flows through the outlets located in the e The air conditioner compressor operates in both Mix instrument panel and at the floor and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button has not been pressed This dehumidifies the air Floor ugh Outside air flows primarily through the floor out ae lets located under the instrument panel e For information on operating the rear defrost refer to f Rear Window Features in Understanding The Fea ps tures Of Your Vehicle pe Outside air flows in equal
347. to the LOCK position and remove the first key 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MMM 3 Insert the second valid Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition
348. to the vehicle electronics NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following steps 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch
349. trols or move the vehicle Auto Down Driver s Side Only The driver s window switch has an Auto Down feature Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch Window Lockout Switch The Window Lockout Switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button a second time 021932803 Power Window Lockout Switch NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or partially open This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the rear windows are open and buffeting occurs open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions e Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equippe
350. u have programmed in the radio pre set push buttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CD s on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc
351. u have to press the Voice Command amp vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command 4vr button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MA Power Driver Seat Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward On some models th
352. udio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e WWw jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other with out wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe dri
353. uggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pod PPP 423 O Prepare For The Appointment 423 df te dies PESE 44444 d eed apne ade rr d 423 o Be Reasonable With Requests 423 N If You Need Assistance 423 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 424 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 424 Oln Mexico Contactes ae ax 9e aha S we 424 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 425 H eve CONOCI e seata a e near see SR 425 W Warranty Information 426 E MOPAR Parts auauua uaaa 426 W Reporting Safety Defects 426 O In The 50 United States And Washington PPP 426 O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 422 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O Traction Grades was xp emi e tus TT Res 429 Quality Grades s soe si othe aha eee ee bait 429 oO Treadwear xig eae Oe DES SES EE Se Remus 429 H Temperaire Grades sye ans oa oh eo EE AE 430 NN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 423 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the curren
354. ull the taillamp housing straight out from the body 3 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it o o a DODE RD ERGE EE es from the housing 814891521 Ed 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4 Pull bulb straight out of socket 5 Reverse this procedure to install bulb and housing Place the two raised blocks past the body NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp And Cargo 2 Remove housing from the cab Lamp ies NES 1 Remove the two screws holding the housing lens to the body as shown 81489fa12 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Remove connector from housing tab for more clear 4 Turn desired bulb socket 1 4 turn and remove socket ance and bulb from housing 81489fce oue 81489fb8 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 5 Pull desired bulb straight from the socket License Lamps 1 Using a screwdriver pry black rubber housing from the bumper 81489fbc e Outside Bulbs Cargo Lamps e Inside Bulb Center High Mounted Stop Lamp oe 6 Reverse this procedure for installation of bulbs and housing 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn counterclockwise 3 Pull bulb from socket xr 81489fdd IDEEN N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 4 Reverse this procedure for installation 2 Rotate the bulb 1 4 turn counterclockwise and pull to Fog Lamps remove from the fog lamp housing 1 Disconnect connector from the fog
355. ure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation Do not reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended saf
356. vehicle This could result in a flash fire If the engine fails to start after you have followed the causing serious personal injury Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push Continued the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 sec ond periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de crease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is located at the right front 5 of the engine compartment f
357. vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on for 15 seconds as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 20 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac
358. ving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if R equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone amp e button and Voice Command VR button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra ti VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structu
359. w some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor s will change from a slow flash to a rapid flash when trained 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MM If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the indicator s starts to flash Do not release the button 3
360. while playing a ru e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options ENS will display the following e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch OFF if equipped subtitles to different subtitle languages that are e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if available on the disc if equipped equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the switch to different audio languages if supported on mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by the disc if equipped pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to s
361. will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right
362. will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MM WARNING Continued Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument and cause an accident that includes you This can happen panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment far away from home or on your own street could cause serious injury including death Air Bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident instrument panel Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFOR
363. will turn off Fog Lights If Equipped O The Fog Lights are turned on by placing the headlight rotary control in the parking light or headlight position and pushing on the headlight rotary control The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time also when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the second upward detent position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control up brighter or down dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odo
364. with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn off the engine A single chime will sound to signity that you have successfully completed the programming NOTE Watch the Seat Belt reminder Light to turn on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while re buckling the seat belt BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the re
365. y To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Coolant Level The coolant recovery bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant anti freeze level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service at tendant of this As long as the engine operating tempera ture is satisfactory the coolant recovery bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant recovery bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat
366. y prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the EVR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook EE aoe e Press the button to begin Automatic downloaded phonebook entri tb Oa LET oa AE TE the Ready prompt and the following beep say deleted dited aic EE Phonebook List Names Delete Erase All U t Phonebook Entri 3 ee N ONEDOOS EANES e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the e Press the N button to begin phonebook entries including the downloaded phone e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say book entries if available Phonebook Erase All e To call one of the names in the list press the VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call
367. y approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation E This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command EvR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command VR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command EvR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in
368. y the trailer is the tongue weight In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements NNS TA H T
369. y to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 CAUTION Continued Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the that protect the performance and durability of dipstick Adding one quart liter of oil when the reading your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission
370. ys properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Continued driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MM Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be locat

2011 Dakota Owner`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents